JP2014083152A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of preventing decrease in interest in a game by temperately deriving a predetermined pattern combination to reduce a feeling of dissatisfaction and a feeling of distrust.SOLUTION: When a degree of occurrence of a cherry, where missing is caused by operation timing, does not reach an average normal level, and is apart by a predetermined degree or larger, a cherry performance is selected in freezing winning to stop a single cherry.

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. The present invention relates to a slot machine from which a display result is derived.

  Conventionally, as such a slot machine, a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery is provided. The player starts rotating by operating the start lever, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel, so that the operation timing is within a predetermined maximum delay time range. There was one in which a prize was generated according to the display result derived when the rotation was stopped and the rotation of all the reels was stopped.

  As such a slot machine, for example, there are types such as small roles, bonuses, and replays as types of winning combinations. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). And, when the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery can be drawn within the range of the predetermined number of frames, the effective combination is arranged, and the winning combination not in the internal lottery is configured. Reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols is not aligned with an effective line.

  Some slot machines of this type include a predetermined prize (such as a cherry) that is internally drawn at the same time as the bonus and can win the predetermined prize with a predetermined probability (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-222418 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, even if a predetermined winning is won, if the stop operation is not performed according to the corresponding operation procedure, the predetermined winning is not generated, and the predetermined symbol combination for generating the predetermined winning is not derived. For this reason, depending on the player's operation procedure, winning is performed with a predetermined probability, such as a situation where the degree of derivation of a predetermined symbol combination is derived only to a degree far from a predetermined probability, or a situation where a predetermined symbol combination is not derived at all. Therefore, a situation may occur in which the predetermined symbol combination is not derived with the degree of design derivation calculated. In such a situation, since the predetermined symbol combination has not been derived, it causes dissatisfaction with the fact that the predetermined winning has not occurred, and the internal lottery for the predetermined winning is not properly performed. There was a fear that even the distrust of whether it was there could reduce the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and prevents the interest of the game from deteriorating by reducing dissatisfaction and distrust by appropriately deriving predetermined symbol combinations. An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can be used.

(1) A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals, credits), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived to a possible variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
A means for controlling the progress of the game, and a delay period (reel effect period) is set (Sf1, Sf8 in FIG. 28) when the delay condition is satisfied (freeze winning by Se4 or Se9 freeze lottery in FIG. 24). Game control means (FIG. 28) for delaying the progress of the game over the delay period;
Specific condition establishment means for establishing a specific condition (cherry winning) at a predetermined ratio (1/121) (internal lottery),
Derivation control means (reel control at the time of cherry winning) for performing control that can cause the variable display device to derive a specific display result ("cherry" of the left reel 2L) when the specific condition is satisfied;
Derivation degree specifying means for specifying the degree of derivation of the specific display result (cherry appearance rate, number of digested games since the previous appearance) from the derivation status of the specific display result (cherry appearance rate, number of digested games since the previous appearance) Processing by the main control unit 41),
The derivation control means has a derivation degree of the specific display result specified by the derivation degree specifying means less than an average derivation degree at which the specific display result can be expected to be derived (it is a normal level. It is less than 1/121, and the number of digested games from the previous appearance is 122 games or more, and is a predetermined degree from the average derivation degree (the appearance rate is less than 2/363, the number of digested games from the previous appearance is 243 games, etc.) When there is a divergence above (one of the appearance rate and the number of digested games from the previous appearance is less than the minimum level), specific derivation control is performed to derive the specific display result in the delay period (FIG. 33 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, when the derivation degree of the specific display result is less than the average derivation degree and deviates from the average derivation degree by a predetermined degree or more, the specific display result is derived in the delay period. For this reason, even when the derivation degree of the specific display result is far from the predetermined probability, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the specific display result is not easily derived by performing the same control as before. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of dissatisfaction and distrust due to the continuation of the state where the derivation degree of the specific display result is too low.

  The derivation status of the specific display result refers to a status related to the derivation of the specific display result in the most recent predetermined period (within a predetermined number of games or within a predetermined time). The degree of derivation of the specific display result is the degree specified by the ratio of the number of times the specific display result is derived within a predetermined period, the presence / absence of whether or not the specific display result is derived within the predetermined period, etc. Any method may be used as long as the specific display result is actually derived.

  The average derivation degree is calculated in consideration of the predetermined ratio and the specific ratio when the specific condition is satisfied at a predetermined ratio and the specific display result is satisfied at the specific ratio when the specific condition is satisfied. An average ratio may be used, and when the specific ratio can be 100% depending on the operation procedure, the predetermined ratio may be set considering only the predetermined ratio.

  Further, the specific condition may be satisfied regardless of whether or not it is the delay period, or may be satisfied only in the delay period. That is, the specific display result may be derived regardless of whether it is a delay period, or may be derived only in the delay period.

  The temporary display result may be a result that does not advance the game by being derived. For example, it is not a result of ending one game by being derived, nor a result of generating a prize. . In such a case, the provisional display result that can be derived in the delay period includes all the display result modes (for example, type, appearance, etc.) that can be derived when not in the delay period, and is more than the number of display result modes. Many modes may be provided, and the same number of modes as the display result modes that may be derived when not in the delay period may be provided. In addition, the provisional display result modes that can be derived in the delay period (for example, type, outcome, etc.) are all included in the display results that can be derived when not in the delay period, and the number of modes is larger than the number of display results. There may be few things. Thus, the temporary display result that can be derived in the delay period and the display result that can be derived when not in the delay period may include common results. Since both the temporary display result and the display result are derived to the variable display device, when a common result is derived, it can be determined from the result whether it is the temporary display result or the display result. However, when the temporary display result is derived, it is possible to make the function different in that the game is not advanced as in the case where the display result is derived. In addition, the provisional display result that can be derived during the delay period and the display result that can be derived when the delay period is not included are different results that do not include common results, and are composed of unique results. May be. In this case, while the result is derived to the same variable display device, the provisional display result or the display result should not be specified (can be specified) from the mode of the derived result. Can do. Also, the mode until the provisional display result is derived in the delay period (for example, the mode at the start of derivation control, the mode during derivation control, the mode at the time of derivation) is until the display result is derived when it is not the delay period. It may be the same as or different from the embodiment.

  (2) In the slot machine of (1), when the display result is derived to the variable display device when it is not the delay period, one game is completed, and according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Winnings can be generated (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, since the display result is derived when it is not in the delay period, one game is completed, and a winning is generated according to the display result. Therefore, the specific derivation in which the specific display result is derived in the delay period. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to prevent the game value from being given more than the design value.

(3) In the slot machine of (1) or (2), prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the display result is derived when the display result is not the delay period. )
The pre-determining means determines a specific result that allows the occurrence of a predetermined prize at the predetermined ratio (about 1/121),
The specific condition is satisfied when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform specific derivation control for deriving a specific display result during the delay period in accordance with a predetermined winning degree.

  (4) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (3), the derivation degree specifying unit is configured to display the specific display for the number of games consumed within a predetermined period as the derivation degree of the specific display result. The derivation rate (appearance rate) occupied by the number of times the result is derived is specified (processing for specifying the cherry appearance rate by the main control unit 41).

  According to such a configuration, specific derivation control can be performed according to the derivation rate of the specific display result.

  (5) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (3), the derivation degree specifying unit determines, as the derivation degree of the specific display result, the number of games that have been consumed since the specific display result was previously derived. (The number of digested games since the previous appearance) is specified (processing for specifying the number of digested games since the previous appearance by the main control unit 41).

  According to such a configuration, specific derivation control can be performed according to the number of games that have been digested since the specific display result was derived last time.

  (6) In any one of the above-mentioned (1) to (5), by deriving the specific display result, a privilege (AT lottery) advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not it is the delay period ) Is notified.

  According to such a structure, it can alert | report that a privilege is provided by derivation | leading-out a specific display result, and can improve the interest of a game also when it is not a delay period and a delay period. .

  The magnitude of the privilege notified when the specific display result is derived may be the same regardless of whether or not it is the delay period, or may be different.

  (7) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (6), the derivation control unit displays the display result of the variable display device in the delay period after the specific display result is derived. Special derivation control for deriving a special display result (double cherries, triple cherries) that suggests that the degree of advantage for the player is greater than the specific display results is performed (see FIGS. 33A and 33B).

  According to such a configuration, even after the specific display result is derived, the player can have a sense of expectation that the special display control is performed and the special display result is derived. The interest of the game can be improved.

  (8) In any one of the above (1) to (7), informing means for informing that the specific derivation control is performed in the delay period (liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speaker) 53, 54, reel LED 55, and reels 2L to 2R).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion between the derivation control during the delay period and the derivation control when it is not the delay period by notifying that the specific derivation control is being performed during the delay period.

  (9) In any one of the above-described (1) to (8), the derivation control means is different from the derivation control when not in the delay period (any one of the stop switches 8L to 8C is operated) When the specific derivation control is performed in such a manner that the reel rotation is stopped and the output stops, the number of drawn frames is not limited, etc., it is notified that the specific derivation control is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion between the derivation control during the delay period and the derivation control when it is not the delay period by notifying that the specific derivation control is being performed during the delay period.

Each of the slot machines may further include the following configuration.
(A) The game control means sets a new delay period (Sf8 of freeze-related processing) that starts from the timing related to the establishment of the special condition when the special condition (stop switch operation or the like) is established. The progress of the game is delayed over the set delay period.

  According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed when the special condition is satisfied during the delay period, and the delay period is newly set from the timing related to the execution of the specific effect. The game progress is delayed. For this reason, for example, there is a problem with the delay period and the specific effect in which only the delay period continues after the special effect is satisfied and the specific effect is already executed and has already ended. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of matching. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that makes the player feel uncomfortable due to the delay period and the specific performance.

(B) Specific effect execution means (main control) for executing a specific effect (control based on the result control data) based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied during the delay period (stop switches 8L to 8R are operated). Processing by the unit 41, processing by the sub-control unit 91),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect until the specific timing in the delay period is reached regardless of the timing at which the specific effect is started (see the column “Regarding control during freeze period” in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, the specific effect is started when the special condition is satisfied during the delay period, and the specific effect is executed until the specific timing is reached regardless of the timing of starting the specific effect. . For this reason, a specific effect can be performed according to a delay period. As a result, for example, the operation is accepted and the specific performance is executed as soon as possible, and the delay period continues for a long time even though it has already ended. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the player, and to improve the interest of the game by the delay period and the specific effect. The specific timing may be a common timing that is not affected by the timing at which the specific performance is started.

(C) provided with a game state control means for shifting to a specific gaming state on condition that a transition condition (for example, RB1 winning) for shifting to a specific gaming state (for example, RB1) is established;
The game control means includes
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection means selects the control pattern at a different rate according to the gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state associated with the establishment of the transition condition ([Freeze lottery in the modification) (See the first example in the About column)).

  According to such a configuration, the delay control is executed in the specific gaming state based on the control pattern selected at a different rate according to the gaming state when the transition condition for shifting to the specific gaming state is satisfied. Therefore, the player's expectation on the delay control can be improved.

(D) The game control means includes:
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection means selects the control pattern at a different rate according to the number of executions of the delay control during the specific period during the specific period (for example, during RB1 winning) ] In the second example).

  According to such a configuration, since the delay control is executed during the specific period based on the control pattern selected at a different rate according to the number of executions of the delay control during the specific period, the player's expectation for the delay control is A feeling can be improved.

(E) The game control means includes:
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Selected by the control pattern selection means on the condition that the operation accepting means accepts a specific operation mode (for example, the number of times the left reel 2L is first stopped) in a specific gaming state (for example, RB1). Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern,
The control pattern selection means selects the control pattern at a different rate according to the number of times the operation receiving means receives a specific operation mode in the specific gaming state (in the [Freeze lottery] column in the modification) See the third example).

  According to such a configuration, since the delay control is executed in the specific gaming state based on the control pattern selected at a different ratio depending on the number of times the specific operation mode is received in the specific gaming state, the delay control is performed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

(F) A game that shifts to the advantageous gaming state on condition that a transition condition (for example, RB1 win) for shifting to an advantageous gaming state (for example, RB1) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is satisfied. Control means (main control unit 41),
The game control means includes
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection means, in the advantageous gaming state associated with the establishment of the transition condition, a game in a period (for example, a period in which RB1 is won) from when the transition condition is established to the transition to the advantageous gaming state The control pattern is selected at a different rate depending on the contents (for example, the number of times the RB left bell has been won) (see the fourth example in the [Freeze lottery] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, based on the control pattern selected at a different rate according to the game content in the period from the time when the transition condition for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is established until the transition to the advantageous gaming state, Since the delay control is executed in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the delay control.

(G) The game control means
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection means selects the control pattern at a different rate according to the time (for example, reel rotation time) required for a predetermined game (for example, from the start to the end of RB1) ([Freeze lottery in the modification) ], See the fifth example).

  According to such a configuration, the delay control is executed based on the control pattern selected at a different rate depending on the time required for the predetermined game, so that the player's expectation for the delay control can be improved. it can.

(H) The game control means
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
On condition that the operation accepting means accepts an operation according to a specific operation procedure (for example, the first stop of the left reel 2L) when a specific condition (for example, RB left bell winning in RB1) is established, Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection unit selects the control pattern at a different rate according to the operation procedure received by the operation reception unit when the specific condition is satisfied (the sixth in the [Freeze lottery] column in the modification). See example).

  According to such a configuration, since the delay control is executed based on the control pattern selected at a different rate according to the operation procedure received when the specific condition is satisfied, the player's expectation for the delay control is performed. Can be improved.

(I) The game control means includes:
Control pattern selection means (freeze lottery by the main control unit 41) for selecting a control pattern including at least information on whether or not to execute delay control (freeze) for delaying the progress of the game from a plurality of types;
Delay control execution means (freeze control by the main control unit 41) for executing the delay control based on the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means,
The control pattern selection means controls the control pattern at a different rate depending on the number of digested games in the specific gaming state (for example, the number of digested games from RB1 winning to winning) in a specific gaming state (for example, during RB1 winning). A pattern is selected (see the seventh example in the [Freeze lottery] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the delay control is executed in the specific gaming state based on the control pattern selected at a different rate depending on the number of digested games in the specific gaming state, the player's expectation for the delay control is A feeling can be improved.

  The “control pattern selected from a plurality of types” in the above (C) to (I) includes a control pattern “do not execute delay control” and a control pattern “execute delay control”. Furthermore, a control pattern such as “execute derivation control A during delay” or “execute derivation control B during delay” may be included during delay control. However, A and B are delay controls with different contents.

  In addition, the “different ratio” in the above (C) to (I) may be that the ratio at which one control pattern is selected is 0% and the ratio at which another control pattern is selected is 100%. Other ratios may be used.

(A) The variable display device derives a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. Is possible,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. And a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation reception means and are operated respectively when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game,
The derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on a determination result of the predetermination means when the derivation operation means is operated (reel control) Stop control),
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
When the delay condition is satisfied, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display regions is a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) for determining whether or not to perform special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)) for performing derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas;
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation enabling means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special derivation control means for performing the special derivation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed before the special derivation control (reel effect control). The positional relationship after the special derivation control (reel effect control) is set so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas that has become the specific positional relationship by (reel effect control) is random. Positional relationship determining means to determine (positional relationship determination processing);
After the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special derivation control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is determined as the positional relationship determination means (positional relationship determination processing). And a positional relationship changing means for changing to the positional relationship determined by
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special derivation control unit, the derivation operation validating unit is configured to make the positional relationship change unit relative to the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas. After the positional relationship is changed, the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 2 in the [Regarding effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation unit is delayed. Since special derivation control in which a plurality of variable display areas are controlled is performed in such a way, it is possible to produce an impactful effect in the display mode of the variable display area, and after the special derivation control, before the derivation operation means becomes effective In addition, since the relative positional relationship between the variable display areas that are in a specific positional relationship by the special derivation control is changed to a random positional relationship, even if special derivation control with a specific positional relationship is performed, special derivation If the control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special derivation control. It is not entirely compromised game of the slot machine that causes out.

(B) The variable display device derives a display result for each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified in a predetermined order. Is possible,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. And a winning can be generated according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation reception means and are operated respectively when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game,
The derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on a determination result of the predetermination means when the derivation operation means is operated (reel control) Stop control),
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
When the delay condition is satisfied, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display regions is a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) for determining whether or not to perform special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)) for performing derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas;
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation enabling means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special derivation control means for performing the special derivation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
After the special derivation control means performs the special derivation control (reel effect control), the relative identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control (reel effect control). Positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) for determining the positional relationship after the special derivation control (reel effect control) so that the specific positional relationship is random;
After the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special derivation control means, the relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is determined as the positional relationship determination means (positional relationship determination processing). And a positional relationship changing means for changing to the positional relationship determined by
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed by the special derivation control unit, the derivation operation validating unit is configured to make the positional relationship change unit relative to the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas. After the positional relationship is changed, the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 2 in the [Regarding effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas is a specific positional relationship in a period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation unit is delayed. Since special derivation control in which a plurality of variable display areas are controlled is performed in such a way, it is possible to produce an impactful effect in the display mode of the variable display area, and after the special derivation control, before the derivation operation means becomes effective In addition, since the relative positional relationship between the variable display areas that are in a specific positional relationship by the special derivation control is changed to a random positional relationship, even if special derivation control with a specific positional relationship is performed, special derivation If the control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special derivation control. It is not entirely compromised game of the slot machine that causes out.

  The slot machines of (a) and (b) may further have the following configuration.

  The positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) randomly determines the amount of change in positional relationship between each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) and other variable display areas (change) (Refer to Example 3 in the “About effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, after the special derivation control, the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas when the derivation operation means is activated becomes more irregular.

  Further, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process), each time the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed, the combination of the positional relationship change amounts between the variable display areas and the other variable display areas. It may be provided with the same combination reduction means (change amount determination lottery using random numbers whose total number is relatively prime) for reducing the ratio of the same combination (in the “About the effect during delay control” column in the modification) See Example 3).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas from being biased when the derivation operation unit is validated for each special derivation control.

  Note that each time the special derivation control is performed, as a method of reducing the ratio that the combination of the change amounts of the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area becomes the same combination, for example, each variable display area As a random number used for the determination, there are a method using a random number whose update range is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing each time the special derivation control is performed, and the like.

  Further, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) is the same change amount reducing means (the total number of which is relatively small) that reduces the rate at which the positional relationship changes between each variable display area and the other variable display areas are the same. (A change amount determination lottery using random numbers) may be provided (see Example 3 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid as much as possible that the specific positional relationship is maintained when the derivation operation means is validated.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the rate at which the amount of change in the positional relationship between each variable display area and the other variable display area is the same, for example, as a random number used to determine each variable display area, the total number of update ranges is mutually A method that uses a random number that is a prime number, a method that uses a random number whose period start value is randomly changed, and a random number extraction timing that is used for each variable display area determination The method of shifting is applicable.

  Further, the positional relationship determining means (positional relationship determining process) determines any positional relationship based on a relative positional relationship between a plurality of different variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) determined in advance. Randomly determined (positional relationship determination lottery) may be used (see Example 3 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the plurality of variable display areas from being biased when the derivation operation unit is validated.

(C) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) included in the operation reception means and operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game,
The derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated (reel stop control),
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
Special derivation control determining means for determining whether or not to perform special derivation control (reel effect control) for displaying specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) in the variable display area when the delay condition is satisfied. (Freeze lottery)
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation enabling means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special derivation control means for performing the special derivation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special derivation control determining means determines that the special derivation control (reel effect control) is to be performed, the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed before the special derivation control (reel effect control). , “Red 7”) is displayed, acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) for randomly determining the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area (reel) reaches a specified speed (constant speed rotation) )When,
After the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) is displayed by the special derivation control (reel effect control), the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) is used according to the acceleration time. Acceleration control means for accelerating the variable display area (reel) to the specified speed (constant speed rotation),
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) by the special derivation control (reel effect control). After that, after the variable display area (reel) is accelerated according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) and reaches the specified speed (constant speed rotation), the derivation operation is performed. The operation of the means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the special derivation control for displaying the specific identification information in the variable display area is performed during the period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed after the game starts, the variable display Since the display mode of the area can produce an impact, and after the specific identification information is displayed by the special derivation control, the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area becomes the specified speed is randomly changed. Even when special derivation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

  The special derivation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

(D) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) included in the operation reception means and operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game,
The derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated (reel stop control),
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
Special derivation control determining means for determining whether or not to perform special derivation control (reel effect control) for displaying specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) in the variable display area when the delay condition is satisfied. (Freeze lottery)
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation enabling means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special derivation control means for performing the special derivation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
After the specific identification information (for example, “Red 7”) is displayed by the special derivation control (reel effect control), until the moving speed of the variable display area (reel) reaches a specified speed (constant speed rotation). Acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) for randomly determining the acceleration time of
After the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) is displayed by the special derivation control (reel effect control), the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) is used according to the acceleration time. Acceleration control means for accelerating the variable display area (reel) to the specified speed (constant speed rotation),
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) by the special derivation control (reel effect control). After that, after the variable display area (reel) is accelerated according to the acceleration time determined by the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) and reaches the specified speed (constant speed rotation), the derivation operation is performed. The operation of the means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is validated (see Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the special derivation control for displaying the specific identification information in the variable display area is performed during the period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed after the game starts, the variable display Since the display mode of the area can produce an impact, and after the specific identification information is displayed by the special derivation control, the acceleration time until the moving speed of the variable display area becomes the specified speed is randomly changed. Even when special derivation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

  The special derivation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

  The slot machines of (c) and (d) may further have the following configuration.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, and a prize is awarded according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. Is supposed to occur,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) may determine the acceleration time at random for each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) (acceleration time determination lottery). Good (refer to Example 5 in the [About effects during delay control] column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the acceleration time is randomly changed for each variable display region, even when special derivation control for displaying specific identification information is performed, the acceleration time of each variable display region is further reduced. Can be regular.

  Further, the acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination processing) reduces the rate at which the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display area becomes the same combination each time the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed. The combination reduction means (acceleration time determination lottery using random numbers whose total numbers are relatively prime) may be provided (see Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a bias from occurring in the acceleration time until the specified speed is reached for each special derivation control.

  Note that each time the special derivation control is performed, as a method of reducing the rate at which the combination of the acceleration times for each variable display area becomes the same combination, for example, update as a random number used to determine each variable display area A method using a random number whose total number is relatively prime, a method of shifting a random number extraction timing each time the special derivation control is performed, and the like are applicable.

  Further, the acceleration time determining means (acceleration time determining process) is the same acceleration time reducing means (acceleration time using random numbers whose total number is relatively prime) for reducing the rate at which the acceleration time is the same for each variable display area. Determination lottery) may be provided (see Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the same acceleration time in a plurality of variable display areas.

  As a method for reducing the rate at which the acceleration time is the same for each variable display area, for example, as a random number used for determining each variable display area, a method using a random number whose update range is relatively prime, As a random number used for determining each variable display area, a method using a random number whose cycle start value is randomly changed, a method for shifting a random number extraction timing used for each variable display area determination, and the like are applicable.

The variable display device includes the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
One game is completed when the display results are derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas, and a prize is awarded according to a combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. Is supposed to occur,
The acceleration time determination means (acceleration time determination process) is to randomly determine any combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations of acceleration times for the different variable display areas (acceleration time combination determination lottery). (Refer to Example 5 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the acceleration time for each of the plurality of variable display areas from being biased.

(E) The variable display device causes a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable to be periodically moved in a predetermined order to derive a display result in each of the variable display areas that can be variably displayed. Is possible,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and one display is completed when the display result is derived in the variable display area. A winning can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display area as a result of the game,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) included in the operation reception means and operated when deriving a display result to the variable display area;
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) after the start of the game,
The derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to the variable display area based on a determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means is operated (reel stop control),
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
Special derivation control determining means for determining whether or not to perform special derivation control (reel effect control) for displaying specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) in the variable display area when the delay condition is satisfied. (Freeze lottery)
When the special derivation control determining means (freeze lottery) determines to perform the special derivation control (reel effect control (freeze state)), the operation of the derivation operation means by the derivation operation enabling means is delayed. Enabling delay means (freeze control),
Special derivation control means for performing the special derivation control (reel effect control) in a period (freeze period) in which the activation delay means delays the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means after the start of the game;
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed, the initial position specification that specifies the initial position (the position of the reel before the reel effect control) that is the position of the variable display area before the special derivation control is performed. Means,
After the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) is displayed by the special derivation control (reel effect control), the position of the variable display area (reel) is changed to the initial position (reel of the reel before the reel effect control). Initial position control means for performing control to return to the position),
When the special derivation control (reel effect control) is performed, the derivation operation enabling means displays the specific identification information (for example, “red 7”) by the special derivation control (reel effect control). Then, after the position of the variable display area (reel) is returned to the initial position (the position of the reel before the reel effect control) by the initial position control means, the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R). ) Is validated (see Example 1 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the modification).

  According to such a configuration, since the special derivation control for displaying the specific identification information in the variable display area is performed during the period in which the activation of the operation of the derivation operation means is delayed after the game starts, the variable display After the specific display information is displayed by the special derivation control after returning the position of the variable display area to the position before the special derivation control, the derivation operation means Because the operation of is enabled, even if special derivation control that displays specific identification information is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed. By performing the derivation control, the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player is not impaired.

  The special derivation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area is, for example, control for stopping specific identification information for a predetermined time in the variable display area, or displaying specific identification information that is not stopped. For example, control for moving at a slower speed than when other identification information is displayed at the specified timing, and control for displaying specific identification information while moving it within the variable display area over a predetermined time.

(F) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine 1),
Game control means (main control unit 41) that is included in the game control means and controls the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation receiving means and are operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), respectively. With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. Including, in a condition, an effective reception state control unit configured to effectively receive that the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) has been operated;
The derivation control means is based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid). Perform derivation control (reel stop control) to derive the display result in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means,
The game control means includes effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when the delay condition is satisfied,
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control means for performing derivation control and special derivation control (reel effect);
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special derivation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where fluctuations are stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) is reached.
Specific time determining means for randomly determining a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) until the second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed;
The second moving speed changing means determines that the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that last changed the moving speed has reached the steady state (constant speed rotation), and then moves the moving speed. Variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is changed based on the elapse of a specific time (setting of left, middle and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means. Change the moving speed of the area (reel 2C / reel 2R),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). (See Example 6 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the example).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special derivation control is performed to perform derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship, so that it is possible to perform an impactful effect in the display mode of the variable display area, and special derivation control After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the movement speed of any of the variable display areas changes toward the specified speed, and then Because the time until the moving speed of the variable display area changes randomly changes, the moving speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and becomes a steady state. Since the relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control becomes a random positional relationship when it is determined to be in the valid acceptance state, the specific positional relationship and Even if special derivation control is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special derivation control. The gaming ability of the slot machine to be derived is not impaired.

(G) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine 1),
Game control means (main control unit 41) that is included in the game control means and controls the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation receiving means and are operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), respectively. With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. Including, in a condition, an effective reception state control unit configured to effectively receive that the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) has been operated;
The derivation control means is based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid). Perform derivation control (reel stop control) to derive the display result in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means,
The game control means includes effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when the delay condition is satisfied,
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control means for performing derivation control and special derivation control (reel effect);
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special derivation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where fluctuations are stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) is reached.
Specific time determining means for randomly determining a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) until the second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed;
The second moving speed changing means is configured to change the moving speed after the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that has changed the moving speed last starts changing the moving speed. From the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determination means (reel 2C / reel 2R) and the specific state (stop state) to the steady state (constant speed) The moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is changed based on the elapse of a sum of a predetermined arrival time (acceleration time) sufficient to reach (rotation),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). Refer to Example 7 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column in the example).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special derivation control is performed to perform derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship, so that it is possible to perform an impactful effect in the display mode of the variable display area, and special derivation control After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the movement speed of any of the variable display areas changes toward the specified speed, and then Because the time until the moving speed of the variable display area changes randomly changes, the moving speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and becomes a steady state. Since the relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control becomes a random positional relationship when it is determined to be in the valid acceptance state, the specific positional relationship and Even if special derivation control is performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed, and the display result is obtained by technical intervention by the player by performing special derivation control. The gaming ability of the slot machine to be derived is not impaired.

(H) The variable display device includes a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be individually identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine)
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game, which is included in the game control means,
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation receiving means and are operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), respectively. ,
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. Including, in a condition, an effective reception state control unit configured to effectively receive that the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) has been operated;
The derivation control means is based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid). Perform derivation control (reel stop control) to derive the display result in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means,
The game control means includes effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when the delay condition is satisfied,
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control means for performing special derivation control (reel effect) for performing derivation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special derivation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where fluctuations are stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), the variable display area (reel) in the specific state (stopped state) A moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) toward the specified speed (constant speed rotation);
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) is reached.
A specific time (time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels) until the movement speed of the variable display area corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is changed from a predetermined range. A specific time determining means for determining at random;
The moving speed changing means is controlled to the specific state (stopped state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) by the specific state control means, and then the plurality of variable display areas (reels) 2L, 2C, 2R) has passed the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means corresponding to any variable display area (reel). And changing the moving speed of the variable display area corresponding to the specific time (the reel timer value for the reel is 0),
The specific time determining means may be configured to change the plurality of variable display areas (before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first) before the moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of any of the variable display areas. Determining all the specific times (time based on the timer values for the left, middle and right reels) corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
In the game control means, after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), the moving speed changing means The specific time (left, middle, and right reels) determined by the specific time determination means before changing the moving speed of any of the variable display areas (before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first) Specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the timer value to the effect control means (sub control unit 91) is further included ([delay in the modified example] Example 8 and Example 9 in the “Regarding effects during control” column).

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special derivation control is performed to perform derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and thereafter the movement speed of the identification information of each variable display area changes toward the specified speed. When the movement time of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and it is judged that the steady state has been reached by changing the time of Because the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the variable display areas that are in a specific positional relationship by the special derivation control is a random positional relationship, even if special derivation control with a specific positional relationship is performed If the derivation control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur, and the special machine derivation control impairs the slot machine's gameability to derive the display result through technical intervention by the player. There is no end.

  The moving speed changing means changing the moving speed toward the specified speed means, for example, that if the specified state is a stop state, the movement is started and accelerated toward the specified speed. If the state is slower than the specified speed, the vehicle is accelerated toward the specified speed. If the specific state is faster than the specified speed, the vehicle is decelerated toward the specified speed.

(I) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can be variably displayed by periodically moving a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified in a predetermined order. ) Can derive the display results,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). By being derived, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) as a result of one game. Slot machine (slot machine)
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game, which is included in the game control means,
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), which are included in the operation receiving means and are operated when deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), respectively. ,
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived in the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
After the start of the game, it has been determined that the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a steady state (constant speed rotation) in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a specified speed. Including, in a condition, an effective reception state control unit configured to effectively receive that the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) has been operated;
The derivation control means is based on the determination result of the prior determination means when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the valid acceptance state (a state where the stop operation is valid). Perform derivation control (reel stop control) to derive the display result in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means,
The game control means includes effective acceptance state delay means (freeze state control) for delaying the effective acceptance state (a state in which the stop operation is valid) when the delay condition is satisfied,
The derivation control means during delay performing the derivation control during delay in the delay period,
In the delay period (period of freeze state) in which the effective reception state delay means delays the effective reception state (stop operation is in a valid state), the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) ) Of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between them becomes a specific positional relationship (for example, a positional relationship in which “red 7” is aligned on a straight line). Special derivation control means for performing special derivation control (reel effect) for performing derivation control;
In the delay period (freeze state period), after the special derivation control (reel effect) is performed, all the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are in a state where fluctuations are stopped or the specified speed. Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state (stop state) which is one of states in which the identification information (symbol) is moved at a different speed;
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). First moving speed changing means for changing the moving speed of the identification information (symbol) in any one of the variable display areas (left reel) toward the specified speed when is in the specific state (stopped state). ,
After the specific state control means controls all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state), at least one of the variable display areas (reel 2L / reels 2L, 2C) ) Is in the steady state (constant speed rotation), the moving speed in any variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) that has not yet been in the steady state (constant speed rotation) is defined. Second moving speed changing means for changing the speed,
All of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are controlled by the specific state control means to the specific state (stop state) for all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Delay period ending means for ending the delay period (freeze state period) on the condition that the steady state (constant speed rotation) is reached.
A specific time (time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels) until the movement speed of the variable display area corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is changed from a predetermined range. A specific time determining means for determining at random,
The first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed after the specific state control means controls the variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to the specific state (stopped state). The variable display area (left reel) based on the elapse of a specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determining means. Change the moving speed of the reel)
The second moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2L / reel 2C) that last changed the moving speed, and then changes the moving speed. The variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R / reel 2R) is determined based on the elapse of a specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) determined by the specific time determination means. Change the moving speed of the reel 2R),
The specific time determining means is the second moving speed changing means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). Determine all the specific times used (time based on left, middle and right reel timer values),
The game control means (main control unit 41), after the specific time determining means determines the specific time (time based on the left, middle, and right reel timer values) in the delay period (freeze state period), The specific time (left, middle) determined by the specific time determining means before the first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed (before starting the rotation of the left reel which starts rotating first). And specific time specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific time specific control information (reel delay command) capable of specifying the time based on the right reel timer value to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). (Example 8 and Example 9 in the “Regarding effects during delay control” column)

  According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas is delayed during a delay period in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is effectively accepted. Special derivation control is performed to perform derivation control of a plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship becomes a specific positional relationship. After that, the movement of the identification information of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped or set to a movement speed different from the specified speed, and then the time until the movement speed of the identification information of the variable display area is changed for the first time, either After the moving speed of the identification information in the variable display area changes toward the specified speed, the time until the moving speed of the identification information in the variable display area is changed next changes randomly. When the movement speed of the identification information of all the variable display areas becomes the specified speed and the steady state is determined and the effective reception state is established, the plurality of variable display areas that are in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control Since the relative positional relationship of the identification information is a random positional relationship, even if special derivation control with specific positional relationship is performed, there is a certain regularity that does not occur if special derivation control is not performed. The slot machine's gaming ability of deriving a display result by technical intervention by a player by performing special derivation control will not be lost.

  The slot machines (f) to (i) may further have the following configuration.

  The first moving speed changing means and the second moving speed changing means change the moving speed toward a specified speed. For example, if the specific state is a stopped state, the movement is started and the moving speed is changed to the specified speed. If the specified state is slower than the specified speed, the vehicle accelerates toward the specified speed. If the specified state is faster than the specified speed, the vehicle decelerates toward the specified speed. That is.

  The first moving speed changing means changes the moving speed of the identification information in any one of the variable display areas toward the specified speed. The moving speed in any one of the variable display areas is changed to the specified speed. The configuration may be such that the moving speed in any two or more variable display areas is changed toward the specified speed.

  Further, the second moving speed changing means changing the moving speed in any of the variable display areas that are not yet in the steady state toward the specified speed is any one that is not yet in the steady state. The moving speed in one variable display area may be changed toward the specified speed, or the moving speed in any two or more variable display areas not yet in the steady state may be set toward the specified speed. The configuration may be changed.

  And an effective reception state control means for effectively receiving that the derivation operation means has been operated, and when the derivation operation means is operated in the effective reception state, the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing derivation control for deriving a display result to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the determination result of the above, and effective acceptance state delay means for delaying the entry to the valid acceptance state The relative derivation of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas is specified in the delay period in which the special derivation control unit delays the effective reception state delay unit from entering the effective reception state. Special derivation control is performed to perform derivation control of the plurality of variable display areas so as to be in a positional relationship, but the operation of the derivation operation means is invalid The invalidation control means for controlling to the invalidation state, and when the derivation operation means is operated, the display result is displayed in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the determination result of the prior determination means. A relative positional relationship of the identification information among the plurality of variable display areas in a period in which the special derivation control unit is controlled to the invalidation state. May be configured to perform special derivation control for performing derivation control of the plurality of variable display regions so that the is in a specific positional relationship.

  Further, the specific time determining means determines a specific time (time based on left, middle, and right reel timer values) corresponding to each variable display area (reel) using random numbers having different update ranges or update rules. It may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, the possibility that the specific time corresponding to each variable display area is synchronized is low, and when it is determined that all the variable display areas are in a steady state and are in an effective reception state, The relative positional relationship of the identification information of the plurality of variable display areas that have been in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control can be made a more random positional relationship.

  Further, the specific time determining means uses a random number (left, middle, right delay random number counter) in which the total number included in the update range is relatively prime to specify a specific time (reel) corresponding to each variable display area (reel). The time based on the timer values for the left, middle, and right reels may be determined.

  According to such a configuration, the possibility that the specific time corresponding to each variable display area is synchronized is further reduced, and when it is determined that all the variable display areas are in the steady state and the valid reception state is entered. In addition, the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas that have been in the specific positional relationship by the special derivation control can be made a more random positional relationship.

The game control means (main control unit 41) includes periodic process execution means for executing periodic processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms).
The second moving speed changing means is a value corresponding to the specific time determined by the specific time determining process for the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) for changing the moving speed (1 symbol). A value obtained by dividing the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while moving is divided by N and the timer value for the middle reel / 1 timer interrupt executed while the symbol is moving A value obtained by dividing the number of times the process (main) is executed by N and a value obtained by multiplying the right reel timer value), and the periodic process (timer interrupt process (main)) is set to two or more predetermined values. When the set value becomes a specific value (0) as a result of updating the set value every time the specified number of times (N) is executed, the movement of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) is performed. The speed may be changed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to measure the specific time without updating the set value every time the periodic processing is executed, and it is possible to reduce the load related to the periodic processing and to measure the specific time. Counter capacity can be reduced.

The game control means (main control unit 41) includes periodic process execution means for executing periodic processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms).
The second moving speed changing means is a value corresponding to the specific time determined by the specific time determining process for the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) for changing the moving speed (1 symbol). A value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while the symbol moves is multiplied by the timer value for the middle reel / one timer interrupt process (main) executed while the symbol moves The value obtained by multiplying the number of times that the timer is used and the timer value for the right reel) and the set value is updated each time the periodic process (timer interrupt process (main)) is executed once. The moving speed of the variable display area (reel 2C / reel 2R) may be changed when the obtained value becomes a specific value (0).

  According to such a configuration, there is no need to perform different processing for each time of the regular processing for counting the specific time, and the branching of the regular processing for the counting of the specific time can be eliminated and the processing can be made common.

(J) The derivation control unit performs control to derive a display result in the plurality of variable display areas (main control unit 41, FIG. 9),
A plurality of types of game states according to combinations of identification information derived on a predetermined line among a plurality of lines set across the plurality of variable display areas. Game state control means (main control unit 41, FIG. 9) for controlling any of the above,
The combination of identification information that can be derived by the derivation control means includes a specific combination ("lip b-lip a-lip" on the LM4 in FIG. a ”) and a non-specific combination different from the specific combination (a combination of different types of symbols on the winning line LN in FIG. 20B),
The gaming state control means includes
The first non-specific combination (the combination of Lip 4 “Lip a / Lip b-Lip a-Bell” in FIG. 20B) among the non-specific combinations is derived on the predetermined line (winning line LN). And controlling to the first gaming state (RT1) among the plurality of types of gaming states,
A second non-specific combination different from the first non-specific combination among the non-specific combinations on the predetermined line (winning line LN) (a combination of Lip 5 “bell-lip a-bell” in FIG. 20C). Is derived to control to the second gaming state (RT2) among the plurality of types of gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the necessity of notifying that it is controlled is higher than the first gaming state,
When the derivation control means derives the second non-specific combination (the combination of Lip 5 “bell-lip a-bell” in FIG. 20C) on the predetermined line (winning line LN), the line The specific combination (the combination of “lip b-lip a-lip a” in FIG. 20C) is simultaneously derived on a different line (for example, invalid line LM4).

  According to such a configuration, when the combination of the second non-specific combination for controlling to the second gaming state in which the necessity of notifying of the control is higher than the first gaming state is derived on a predetermined line. Then, a specific combination composed only of identification information having the same and / or similar outer shape is derived on a line different from the line. For this reason, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the control is performed in the second gaming state where there is a high need to notify that the control has been performed.

  It should be noted that the non-specific combination may be different from the specific combination in that the non-specific combination is a combination including at least identification information other than the same and / or similar identification information.

  In addition, the second non-specific combination of the non-specific combinations may be at least a combination of identification information different from the first non-specific combination.

  The identification information having the same outer shape refers to identification information having the same identification information and the same outer shape (for example, the shape of the outer edge of the symbol). For example, for identification information with the same outer shape, identification information that has the same outer shape as the one identification information and has a different overall color and pattern, and identification information that has the same outer shape and one color and pattern that differs from the one identification information Is included. In addition, identification information having a similar outer shape is an identification having a common aesthetic (impression) caused by the visual perception of a player who is a consumer because one identification information and the outer shape (for example, the shape of the outer edge of a symbol) are similar. This refers to information, and as a result, identification information that can be conceptually recognized as the same identification information (it is difficult to recognize as different identification information). For example, identification information having a similar outer shape includes (a) identification information that differs only in size from one identification information, (b) identification information that includes a plurality of identification information that has the same outer shape as one identification information, and (1) Identification information with a character attached to one identification information, (d) Identification information that recalls the same identification information as one identification information whose direction is different from one identification information, (e) One identification information Identification information with the same outline as a whole, lacking a part, (f) identification information with a part of the identification information raised but the outline as a whole, (ki) identification Identification information in which the shape of the information is different but the overall external shape is the same, (g) identification information reminiscent of one identification information, and a plurality of (a) to (g) However, the identification information is conceptually the same as the one identification information. They include identification information that can be recognized as.

  The plurality of lines may include only a winning line that can generate a winning by deriving a combination of predetermined identification information that generates a winning, and not only a winning line but also a winning is generated. Even if a predetermined combination of identification information is derived, it may include an invalid line that does not generate the winning. Further, the line is not limited to a straight line as long as it is set across a plurality of variable display areas. For example, a V-shaped line connecting the upper left, middle lower, and upper right, or a reverse V The line may be any shape such as a letter-shaped line.

(K) Progress operation (operation of start switch 7, operation of stop switches 8L to 8R) in a state in which the game can proceed (a state where a predetermined number of bets are set and any of reels 2L to 2R is rotating) Game progress control means (main control unit 41, FIG. 9) for performing control to advance the game when
An external output control means (main control unit 41, FIG. 10) for performing control to externally output a signal related to the game (external output signal),
The external output control means includes
Second gaming state signal output means (Sk101 to Sk113 in FIG. 10) for outputting a second gaming state signal (ART signal) corresponding to the second gaming state on the condition of control to the second gaming state;
Game-related signal output means (Sk114 to Sk119 in FIG. 10) for outputting a game-related signal (medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, etc.) relating to the game in accordance with the control of progressing the game,
The second gaming state signal output means is a game-related signal output period after the next game is newly started after the output of the second gaming state signal is started and the game-related signal can be output. The second game state signal is continuously output until reaching a specific timing not included (when the game control of the next game ends (when all reels are stopped or when the medal OUT signal is output)) (Sk107 to FIG. 10). Sk113, see FIGS. 11 to 16).

  According to such a configuration, the output of the second gaming state signal is continued until a specific timing that is not included in the game-related signal output period after the next game is newly started, The time required for the external device to receive the second gaming state signal can be ensured without hindering the progress of the game, and the second gaming state signal is transmitted (output ended) while the game-related signal is being output. Therefore, it is possible to easily specify whether or not the game related signal received on the external device side is in the second gaming state.

  “To output a second gaming state signal corresponding to the second gaming state on condition that the second gaming state is controlled” means that the second gaming state signal is output before being actually controlled to the second gaming state. May be output, or a second gaming state signal may be output after controlling to the second gaming state.

  In addition, the game-related signal may be a signal that is output as the game progresses, and may be a signal that directly indicates the progress of the game, such as a signal that indicates the start or end of the game. When a signal indicating information other than (such as a signal indicating a gaming value used for setting the number of bets) is necessarily output as the game progresses, such a signal may be used as a game-related signal. .

  The game-related signal output period during which the game-related signal can be output is a predetermined period from when the progress operation is performed until the output of the game-related signal is completed (for example, after the start switch 7 is operated, During the period until the output of the medal IN signal for several minutes is completed, when all the reels stop and no medal payout occurs after the final stop operation is performed among the operations of the stop switches 8L to 8R, all the reels This is a period up to the time of stoppage, which is a period of time until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed when all reels stop and a medal payout occurs. It may be a predetermined period, or may be a fixed period regardless of the progress operation or the type of game-related signal.

It is a system configuration | structure figure which shows the structure of the game system in an Example. It is a front view of a slot machine. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a block diagram relevant to the output of an external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the external output control process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating a lottery object combination, the number of judgment values, and reel control. It is a figure for demonstrating a lottery object combination, the number of judgment values, and reel control. It is a figure for demonstrating a lottery object combination, the number of judgment values, and reel control. It is a flowchart for demonstrating freeze production lottery processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a freeze lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel production type lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating a cherry appearance frequency determination table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a freeze related process. It is a figure for demonstrating a result lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on reel rotation control data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on result control data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on result control data is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating a timing chart when control based on result control data is performed. It is a flowchart for demonstrating AT lottery relevant processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an AT lottery table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main side ceiling related 1st process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a sub-side ceiling related 1st process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main side ceiling related 2nd process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a sub-side ceiling related 2nd process. It is a flow chart for explaining main side production specific processing. It is a timing chart which shows transition of the counted net increase of medals and the notified net increase. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 2. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 3. It is a figure which shows the random number used when determining the change amount of each reel in change amount determination lottery. It is a figure which shows the winning range at the time of determining the change amount of each reel in change amount determination lottery. 10 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects as a modification of Example 3. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of each reel determined in positional relationship determination lottery. 12 is a timing chart showing the control status of freeze and reel effects in Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after reel effect which the main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the random number value for delay. It is a figure which shows the method of calculating the timer value for left, middle, and right reels from the random number value for left, middle, and right delay. It is a figure which shows the update method in the modification of the random value for left, middle, and right delay. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the acceleration process after a reel effect. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation at the time of applying the acceleration process after reel production. It is a figure for demonstrating the same and / or similar symbol when taking a watermelon symbol as an example.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a gaming system according to the present embodiment to which the present invention is applied.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of slot machines 1 arranged in parallel on a plurality of gaming islands arranged in a game hall, and one-to-one with respect to the slot machines 1. Correspondingly installed call lamp device 200, a collection unit 50 for collecting game information of each slot machine 1, and a relay unit for relaying game information data based on each game information collected by the collection unit 50 to the hall computer 140 60 and game information data including game information of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall relayed by each relay unit 60, and each slot machine 1 included in the received game information data And a hall computer 1406 for managing game information and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of slot machines 1 are installed on the amusement island of the present embodiment, and a call lamp device 200 is provided above the corresponding slot machine 1. The calling lamp device 200 used in the example has a display function for various game information and messages by having a display unit on the front surface in addition to a normal lamp lighting function.

  Further, the slot machine 1 and the collection unit 50 of this embodiment are connected via a signal cable 59 as shown in FIG. 1, and each collection unit 50 is further connected to the relay unit 60 via a communication cable 61. The collection unit 50 and the relay unit 60 are capable of bidirectional data communication through a simple local area network, and the collection unit 50 receives various signals (described later) output from each slot machine 1. The game information data including the collected game information and the game state history data including the game state history (state-specific data) are transmitted.

  Further, each of these relay units 60 is connected to the hall computer 140 via a hub 57 by a communication cable 58, and the relay unit 60 and the hall computer 140 are both connected by a local area network capable of relatively high-speed data communication. The transmission data transmitted from each collection unit 50 is relayed by the relay unit 60 and transmitted to the hall computer 140, so that the hall computer 140 relates to each slot machine 1. Information can be collected and managed centrally.

  The call lamp device 200 of this embodiment is also connected to the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60 in the same manner as the collection unit 50. The call lamp device 200 and the hall computer 140 are connected via the relay unit 60. Two-way data communication can be performed, and the hall computer 140 can perform model setting of the slot machine 1 corresponding to each calling lamp device 200 and various condition settings regarding game information. Yes.

  First, the slot machine 1 used in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the front door 1b.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 2, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has a “watermelon” (for example, the symbol of the area number 20 of the left reel 2L) and a “bell” (for example, the area number 19 of the left reel 2L). ), “Rip b” (for example, the symbol of area number 18 on the left reel 2L), “Red 7” (for example, the symbol of area number 17 on the left reel 2L), “Lip a” (for example, left reel 2L) Area number 9), "BAR" (for example, the pattern of area number 8 on the left reel 2L), "cherry" (for example, the pattern of area number 7 on the left reel 2L), and "white 7" (for example, A plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols such as the symbol of the area number 3 of the left reel 2L are drawn in a predetermined order.

  “Lip b” is common in that it is based on the design of “Lip a”, and is different in that a line is added under the letters “REPLAY”. For this reason, “Lip a” and “Lip b” are different types of symbols, but since the external shapes are similar, they are collectively referred to as “lip”. Symbols with similar outer shapes refer to symbols that share the same aesthetics (impressions) caused by the visual perception of the player who is the consumer, and as a result are the same symbols conceptually. A design that can be recognized (it is difficult to recognize as a different design). As described above, “lip a” and “lip b” differ only in that a line is added under the word “REPLAY”, and are common in other points, and therefore have similar external shapes. It can be said.

  The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 5), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, is stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out medals used for setting medals and bets (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), start switch operated when starting a game 7. Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and an effect switch 5 for use in effects. There are provided operable by the player.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  Further, the front door 1b displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) A certain period of time has passed since (reel rotation start to derive game results) (Waiting to start reel rotation for deriving the game result because there is no wait) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay to notify that it is in a replay game to be described later A game display unit 13 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 5) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R (see FIG. 5) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective are provided. It has been.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, a game stop state (until a reset operation is performed) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after completion of a state advantageous to the player, such as at the end of RT2, which will be described later) A stop switch 36a for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function to be controlled in a state in which the progress of the game is controlled), automatic settlement processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the medal stored as credit is determined by the player's operation) Automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting whether the automatic settlement function to be controlled (returning (returning)) is enabled / disabled, and the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 From the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which is provided inside the housing 1a, and the medal insertion portion 4 A medal selector (not shown) having an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side, and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 5) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 5), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the amount of stored medal stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, the overflow tank 35 is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 2) becomes valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the winning line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 to LM4. When a combination of symbols (for example, Lip-Rip-Rip) that is awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4 is aligned, the symbols that make up a particular winning for the winning line LN It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 and the lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. . In the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 20A, when the promotion replay, the fall replay, the special replay, etc. are won or when the transition is stopped, the replay probability is different among RT0 to RT3. It is comprised so that it may transfer to the game state to do.

  In this embodiment, an example in which three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are applied is described. However, even if only one reel is provided and a winning is determined according to the display result of the one reel. Alternatively, two reels may be provided, and a winning determination may be made according to a combination of display results of two reels, or four or more reels may be provided, and a winning may be determined according to a combination of display results of these reels. It may be determined.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single cable and connector. Are connected to each other, and all the connectors that connect these cables and the respective boards are connected to each other so that the respective parts on the side of the effect control board 90 can operate and receive commands from the main control part 41. Become. For this reason, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is no end to it.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a control clock generation circuit 42, a random number clock generation circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection circuit. 48 and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer, executes a control program stored in a ROM 506, which will be described later, and performs processing related to the progress of the game, and also includes a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40. Control each part directly or indirectly.

  The control clock generation circuit 42 generates a control clock CCLK serving as an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the main control unit 41. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via, for example, the control external clock terminal EXC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 43 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the main control unit 41. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 6, for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be set to be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42.

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The reset circuit 49 includes a watchdog timer, and provides a user reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the watchdog timer expires, that is, when the operation of the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 stops for a certain period of time.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. 6 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU 505, a ROM 506, and a RAM 507. A CTC (counter / timer circuit) 508, a random number circuit 509, a PIP (parallel input port) 510, a serial communication circuit 511, and an address decoding circuit 512.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 6 includes an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, a direction control function of the address bus, the data bus, and each control signal. Is a bus interface. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the main control unit 41, and transmits / receives address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like to / from these external devices. Anything to do. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to internal data of the main control unit 41 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and stores internal data such as a game control program and fixed data stored in the ROM 506, for example. This is a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  The clock circuit 502 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the main control unit 41. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 43. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the main control unit 41.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information serving as internal information of the main control unit 41, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. Here, the chip individual number may be read from the user program, while the ID number may be set so as not to be read from the user program. Note that the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the main control unit 41 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal (system reset signal) is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is performed when a low level signal (user reset signal) is input to the external user reset terminal XURST for a certain period of time, or when a time-out signal of the built-in watchdog timer (WDT) is generated, or when running outside the specified area. This reset is caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of prohibition (IAT). In this embodiment, as described above, since the watchdog timer (WDT) mounted on the reset circuit 49 is used without using the built-in watchdog timer, a user reset signal is input to the external user reset terminal XURST. Alternatively, a user reset occurs when the out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) occurs.

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state. When a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period of time. An interrupt that occurs. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The maskable interrupt INT is caused by the fact that a low level signal is input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, Multiple types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be.

  The CPU 505 provided in the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM 506. At this time, the CPU 505 reads out fixed data from the ROM 506, the CPU 505 writes various data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501 or the PIP 510, and the CPU 505 receives the input of various signals via the external bus interface 501 or the serial communication circuit 511. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 is also performed.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 505 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 506, so that the main control unit 41 (or CPU 505) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  A ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores a user program for game control, fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the main control unit 41 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the slot machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset, and whether the storage content of the ROM 506 has been changed. Execute security check processing to check whether or not. The security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage contents of the external memory externally attached to the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, all areas of the RAM 507 are backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 507 are saved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

  The CTC 508 provided in the main control unit 41 includes, for example, a built-in 3-channel (PTC0-PTC2) 8-bit programmable timer, and includes a timer circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has its timer value updated in accordance with a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from high level to low level). If it is. The CTC 508 may include, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter having 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 only needs to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 resets the start time of the random number generated by the free run counter used for randomly determining the extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset or the random number circuit 509. A free-run counter or the like used for determining each item at random may be included. Alternatively, these free-run counters may be included in an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 different from the CTC 508 such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  A random number circuit 509 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In the present embodiment, on the game control board 40 side, numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery to be described later is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509 based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 to process or update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery. May be counted. In the following, it is assumed that numerical data indicating random numbers for internal lottery is not processed by software from numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware. The random number circuit 509 may be built in the main control unit 41 or may be externally attached to the main control unit 41 as a random number circuit chip different from the main control unit 41. .

  The random number for internal lottery is a value used to determine whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535” in this embodiment.

  The PIP 510 included in the main control unit 41 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and includes an input port P0 to an input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal, and an input port P3 to an input port P5 serving as a function shared terminal. . The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  An address decoding circuit 512 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 6 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  The ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control user program and the security check program 506A. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 506 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 505 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  The RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 is provided with a game control data holding area 590 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 507, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 505 has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 505 fetches an instruction from the ROM 506. Therefore, the stored value in the refresh register is updated every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 505.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the serial communication circuit 511. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 receives the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. Then, the main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed at a certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508.

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, a new interrupt occurs at that point. It will be.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as a basic process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 2), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In the liquid crystal display 51, as will be described later, when controlled by the AT when the gaming state is RT3 or RT1, a message image such as “AT in progress” is displayed small. In addition, when 3 choice lips 4 to 6 are won in RT1 during AT, AT will be started when the winning game is ended, regardless of whether or not the lip 5 (special lip) is won in the winning game. And an AT start effect for starting the count of 50 games is executed. More specifically, a message image such as “AT start !!” is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51, and the number of remaining games controlled by the AT is displayed in a countdown format.

  Further, in this embodiment, when shifting from RT3 during AT to RT1, a message image such as “a little more until RT2” is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. On the other hand, when the transition is made from RT1 to RT2 during AT, an AT start effect is performed (there may already be started) and the background image on the liquid crystal display 51 also changes. As described above, in this embodiment, the degree of change in the production mode before and after the transition from RT1 to RT2 during the AT is larger than the degree of the production mode before and after the transition from RT3 to RT1 during the AT. The production is executed.

  The AT is an effect state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 and refers to an assist time that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying information (such as an operation procedure) according to the internal lottery result can be executed.

  Further, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the net increase in medals during AT. The “net increase” is a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number of bets during AT from the number of medals paid out during AT. That is, the net increase is a value indicating the player's profit during the AT. The player can grasp the net increase in medals during AT by checking the net increase in medals displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. The effect of notifying the net increase in medals during AT is also referred to as the net increase notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. An output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may perform output control of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the parts.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. Switch detection circuit 96, time information including date information and time information A clock device 97 that outputs power, a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, etc. The sub CPU 91a receives various commands for performing effects in response to a command transmitted from the game control board 40, and controls the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub-control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 507, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in the RAM 507. In addition to the storage, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 becomes zero, and the RAM 507 is stored. Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 507. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 at the time of activation regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 507 on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 507 is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the power is turned on. In addition, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 507. However, only the data stored in the RAM 507 that is necessary for returning to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up and the power is turned on. It is good also as a structure which returns to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before power interruption.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, non-saved work, general work, special work, unused area, and stack area.

  Important work includes various display devices, LED display data, I / O input / output data, game time counter, etc., and in addition to data that is inconvenient to initialize, the game state is controlled to any of RT0-3 This is a work in which an RT flag for specifying whether or not it has been stored. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is destroyed at the time of activation. The general work includes a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals to be paid out, a total number of medals paid out in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a state advantageous to a player such as RT2 described later), a gaming state flag described later, and the like. It is a work that stores data that can sometimes be initialized. The special work is a work in which data such as various software random numbers that are initialized only before the start of setting is stored. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 507, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area is one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, when a RAM abnormality error occurs, when a predetermined gaming state ends, or when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, When the data has not been destroyed, when five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is on at the time of start-up and transitions to the setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the RAM 507, all the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the important work and the used stack area are initialized, that is, the area from the unsaved work area to the unused stack area is initialized. The After initialization 1 is executed, the game state is controlled to RT0 described later. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of a predetermined gaming state, and in initialization 2, in the storage area of the RAM 507, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area, that is, from the general work to the unused stack area. The area is initialized. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is off at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 507 is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 507 are initialized.

  In this embodiment, the initialization 1 is performed before the transition to the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the transition to the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs when the power is turned on, initialization 1 is executed, and the control state before that is initialized.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 7, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main control unit 41, and the information providing terminal board of the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Through 1010, the data is output to an external device such as a data display terminal installed corresponding to the hall computer or the slot machine 1.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of winning, a winning combination Among them, as described later, the fact that the player has shifted to RT2 by winning Lip 5 (hereinafter also referred to as a special lip) that results in winning when the combination of "Bell-Lip a-Bell" stops on the winning line LN. An ART signal indicating, a BB + RB signal indicating that the gaming state is in a later-described big bonus (also referred to as BB) or a regular bonus (also referred to as RB), an RB signal indicating that the gaming state is RB, and a gaming state BB signal indicating that BB is in progress, the next game operation by waiting for operation of the MAXBET switch 6 or start switch 7 by the player The game waiting display signal indicating that the technique is waiting, the door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, the setting change signal indicating that the setting change mode has been entered, and the setting confirmation mode have been entered. A setting confirmation signal indicating the effect, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output. As described above, the ART signal is a signal indicating that the operation has shifted to RT2. However, as will be described later, since RT2 is not controlled unless it is substantially in AT, when it is controlled to RT2, it is AT + RT2. It can also be said to be a signal indicating that ART is in progress.

  In this embodiment, in order to share with other slot machines, a game state is shown between the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000 in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals. A spare signal line is connected, and an error output signal line that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the BB + RB signal, the ART signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, the spare signal, and the game waiting display signal are directly passed through the relay circuit 1001. It is output to the information providing terminal board 1010 as a pulse signal.

  On the other hand, the door opening signal, setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. The information is converted and output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, BB + RB signal, ART signal, RB signal, BB signal, spare signal, and game waiting display signal output from the external output board 1000 are sent to the external device via the information providing terminal board 1010. Is output. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is re-converted into the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal again by the information providing terminal board 1010 to the external device. Will be output.

  External output signals include door opening signal, setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, setting confirmation signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are Since these signals are not frequently output, it is not necessary to individually provide external output terminals for these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the external device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, setting confirmation signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted by the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 into security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified. It is possible to output these door opening signal, setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal from one terminal, and more terminals than necessary. Need not be provided.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment, particularly control contents related to external output control, will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs the startup process (main) shown in the flowchart of FIG. When a user reset signal is input, the process starts from the step Sa2 of the startup process (main). That is, while starting from the security mode in which the security check process is performed only in the case of activation upon power-on, the user program stored in the ROM 506 is executed by omitting the security check process in the case of activation due to time-up of the watchdog timer. The user mode is started.

  In the startup process (main) accompanying the input of the system reset signal, first, the CPU 505 executes the security check process based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 (Sa1). At this time, the main control unit 41 enters the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

  After the security check process in step Sa1, the operation state of the main control unit 41 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, and the execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is started. As described above, at the time of startup accompanying the input of the user reset signal, the user mode is started without going through the security mode.

  In the user mode, first, internal devices such as the serial communication circuit 511, peripheral ICs, interrupt mode, stack pointer, detection status of switches, output status of external output signals, etc. are initialized (Sa2), then the I register and IY The register value is initialized (Sa3). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 507 is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 507 is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 507 are calculated (Sa5). Next, the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 are acquired, and after setting the stop function and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the main control unit 41 (Sa6), a power failure is detected. The power interruption flag indicating that is cleared (Sa7).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is 0 (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 507 is not normal. In this case, after executing initialization 1 (Sa22) for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 507 except the used stack area and the non-initialization area, is the setting key switch 37 turned on? If the setting key switch 37 is on, interrupt is permitted (Sa21), and the setting change process, that is, the setting change state is entered.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa23, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to error processing, that is, RAM abnormality error state. .

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If the power interruption processing (main) is normally performed, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for failure diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 507 is not normal. Therefore, the process proceeds to step Sa22 to execute initialization 1, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa23. If this is the case, the interruption is permitted (Sa21), and the process proceeds to the setting change process. If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in step Sa23, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to error processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 507 is normal. Therefore, the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa10), and the unstored work, the unused area, and the unused area in the RAM 507 are cleared. After initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa11), it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa12). If the setting key switch 37 is on, the process proceeds to step Sa20. Initialize 1 is executed, interrupt is permitted (Sa21), and the process proceeds to the setting change process.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa12, each register is returned to the state before power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack (Sa13), indicating that the state has shifted to RT2 in the state after return. It is determined whether the output control of the ART signal is being performed (Sa14). If the output of the ART signal is not being controlled in the state after the return in step Sa14, it is further determined whether or not the state after the return is RT2 (Sa15). If the state after the return in step Sa15 is not RT2, the process proceeds to step Sa17, and the output of the ART signal is being controlled in the state after return in step Sa14, or the state after return in the step Sa15 is RT2. If it is medium, the output instruction of the ART signal is set in the RAM 41c (Sa16), and the process proceeds to step Sa17.

  In step Sa17, it is determined whether the game state after return is BB or RB. If the game state after return is not BB or RB, the process proceeds to step Sa18. Is in BB or RB, an instruction to change the BB signal or RB signal is set in the RAM 41c (Sa18), and then the process proceeds to step Sa19.

  In step Sa19, the interrupt is permitted, and then the process returns to the last execution before power interruption.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41 after the setting change process.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. . In the BET process, as a process for starting the game, when the start switch 7 is operated, an output command for instructing output of a medal IN signal for the number of medals used for the set bet number is set in the RAM 41c. To do.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a prescribed number of bets that can be set is determined according to the gaming state (RT0 to RT3), and a prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state are set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number (for example, 3) of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. Including gamers. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role.

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sd2, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is allowed based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sd1. Perform processing. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 507 based on each lottery result.

  In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 507. Of the winning flags for each winning combination, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the re-playing winning combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM 507 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state, and the RT described later are specified. The determination is made according to the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the value of the RT flag, the bet number and the set value.

  The random value storage work is a storage area in which numerical data latched simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7 is stored. Every time new numerical data is latched, the latched numerical data is processed by a timer interruption process thereafter. The numerical data read in (main) and stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest numerical data latched newly.

  In the internal lottery, an internal lottery target, the current gaming state flag value, the RT flag value, and the number of determination values determined corresponding to the set value are stored in a random number for internal lottery (a lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 507. The internal winning flag storage work is constituted by a storage area of 2 bytes, for example. When the general combination is won, the winning flag of the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no combination or combination of combinations is won, the general combination storing work is cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 9, in the reel rotation process in the step Sd3, the process of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the corresponding reel 2L in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player being detected. A process of stopping the rotation of 2C and 2R is executed. Hereinafter, the control for rotating or stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at the normal time by the reel rotation process is also referred to as the reel control at the normal time.

  Here, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 506A when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. A stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames by timing at which the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor that makes one turn at a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335) is used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven in 336 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel is described. To explain, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Continuing, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected by continuing the rotation of the reels that have not been operated.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the reel starts to rotate. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, on the main control unit 41 side, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel in accordance with the player's stop operation. However, when the production state is not AT, the left reel 2L is first stopped. Therefore, if the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time when the sub-control unit 91 is not in the AT state and the navigation effect is not being executed, Control is performed to give a predetermined penalty that is unfavorable for a player who is not charged. That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the left reel 2L for the first time when not in the AT and when the navigation effect is not being executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, in the winning determination process in step Sd4, the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R when it is determined in step Sd3 that rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped. A process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred is executed. In Sd4, when the display result accompanied with the transition of the gaming state is stopped, the RT flag is updated to a value for specifying the gaming state according to the display result. Thereby, it is possible to shift to a gaming state according to the display result.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined in step Sd4 that a winning has occurred, processing such as adding credits and paying out medals is performed based on the number of payouts corresponding to the winning. In the payout process, an output command for instructing output of a medal OUT signal for the number of medals given to the player by adding credits and paying out medals is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. In the game end process, when the BB or RB game is started from the next game, a change command for changing the BB signal or the RB signal to ON is set in the RAM 41c. In addition, when RT2 ends in the game, a change command for changing the ART signal to OFF is set in the RAM 41c. When a special lip is won in RT1, an ART signal output command is set in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 10 shows an external output control process that is executed once every time the above-described timer interrupt process (main) is executed four times by the main control unit 41 periodically (about 0.56 ms) and interrupting and executing the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the external output control process, first, it is determined whether or not an ART signal output command is set (Sk101), and if an ART signal output command is set, the process proceeds to Sk102. As described above, the ART signal output command is set when a special lip is won.

  In Sk102, the output command is cleared, and the output of the ART signal is started in Sk103. The value of the ART output counter for specifying the period during which the ART signal is output in Sk104 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to Sk114. . The value of the ART output counter is stored in the RAM 41c.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Sk101 that the ART signal output command is not set, the process proceeds to Sk105 to determine whether or not the ART signal is being output (output control is in progress).

  If it is determined in Sk105 that the ART signal is being output, the value of the ART output counter is incremented by 1 in Sk106, and the process proceeds to Sk107. In Sk107, when one game is completed and the medal OUT signal is output, it is determined whether or not the output is completed. Specifically, whether or not the newly started game has ended since the output of the ART signal has been started and the process has shifted to the game end process in Sd6 of FIG. 9, and whether or not the medal OUT signal is being output. It is determined whether or not. In Sk107, when one game is finished and the medal OUT signal is not output, or after one game is finished and when the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the process proceeds to Sk108.

  In Sk107, when one game is finished and it is determined that the output is completed when the medal OUT signal is output, the value of the ART output counter is determined in Sk108. It is determined whether a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more has been reached. In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to 2000 ms or more is 2000 ÷ (interval in which external output control processing is executed = 0.56 × 4) ≈892.8, and thus is a value of 893 or more. In Sk108, if 2000 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the output of the ART signal to the end of the newly started game, it is determined that a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more has been reached.

  If it is determined in Sk108 that the value of the ART output counter has reached a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more, the output of the ART signal is stopped in Sk109, the value of the ART output counter is reset, and the process proceeds to Sk114. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sk108 that the value of the ART output counter has not reached a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more, a time unreachable flag indicating that the value has not been reached in Sk110 is set in the RAM 41c. The time unachieved flag is set when the game is newly started and ended before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the ART signal is started. For this reason, the case where the time non-achievement flag is set corresponds to, for example, the case where the current game is immediately started after the previous game is ended and then the stop switch is operated to end it. If the time unsuccessful flag is set in Sk110, the process proceeds to Sk114 without stopping the output of the ART signal.

  When it is determined at Sk107 that the medal OUT signal is being output even when one game is not finished or at the end of one game, it is judged at Sk111 whether or not the time unreachable flag is set. That is, after the ART signal is output and after a new game is finished, since 2000 ms has not passed when the one game is finished, the ART signal is still being output. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If it is determined in Sk111 that the time non-achieved flag is set, it is determined in Sk112 whether or not it is the timing when the medal IN signal output control is finished. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one newly started game is finished after outputting the ART signal and the output of the medal IN signal of the next started game is finished.

  When it is determined in Sk112 that it is the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is finished, the output of the ART signal is stopped in Sk113, the value of the ART output counter is reset, the time unreachable flag is cleared, The process proceeds to Sk114.

  When it is determined at Sk105 that the ART signal is not being output, when it is determined at Sk111 that the time non-arrival flag is not set, or at Sk112, it is determined that it is not the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is finished. If so, go to Sk114.

  In Sk114, it is determined whether or not the medal IN signal output is being controlled. The medal IN signal is such that a signal of about 25 ms is output with an interval of about 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command, and the medal IN signal output command is set. After that, if the output control of the designated number of medal IN signals has not been finished yet, the process proceeds to step Sk116. On the other hand, if the medal IN signal output control is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the medal IN signal output command is set (Sk115). If the medal IN signal output command is set, the process proceeds to step Sk116. move on.

  In step Sk116, after the medal IN signal output process is performed, the external output control process is terminated and the process returns to the original position of the timer interrupt process (main). In the medal IN signal output process, when the medal IN signal output command is set, the medal IN signal output command is cleared, and the medal IN signals for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command. The output control of the medal IN signal is being performed, and the control for outputting the signal of about 25 ms is performed at an interval of about 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the output command of the medal IN signal. If the medal IN signal output control for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command is not completed, the medal IN signal output control is continued, and the medal IN signal output command is specified. If the output of the medal IN signals for the number of medals has been completed, the medal IN signal output control is terminated.

  If the medal IN signal output command is not set in the step of Sk115, it is determined whether or not the medal OUT signal output is being controlled (Sk117). The medal OUT signal is such that a signal of about 25 ms is output with an interval of about 25 ms corresponding to the number of medals specified by the output command of the medal OUT signal, and the output command of the medal OUT signal is set. After that, if the output of the specified number of medal OUT signals has not been completed yet, the process proceeds to step Sk119. On the other hand, if the medal OUT signal output control is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the medal OUT signal output command is set (Sk118). If the medal OUT signal output command is set, the process goes to step Sk119. move on.

  In step Sk119, after the medal OUT signal output process is performed, the external output control process is terminated, and the process returns to the original position of the timer interrupt process (main). In the medal OUT signal output processing, when the medal OUT signal output command is set, the medal OUT signal output command is cleared, and the medal OUT signals for the number of medals specified by the medal OUT signal output command. Output control is performed, and a control for outputting a signal of about 25 ms with an interval of about 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the output command of the medal OUT signal is being performed, and the output control of the medal OUT signal is being performed. If the medal OUT signal output control for the number of medals specified by the medal OUT signal output command is not completed, the medal OUT signal output control is continued, and the medal OUT signal output command is specified. If the medal OUT signal output for the number of medals is completed, the medal OUT signal output control is terminated. .

  If the medal OUT signal output command is not set in the step of Sk118, it is determined whether or not the BB signal or RB signal change command is set (Sk120), and the BB signal or RB signal change command is determined. Is set, the output state (ON / OFF) of the BB signal or RB signal is changed according to the command, the change command is cleared (Sk121), the external output control process is terminated, and the timer interrupt Return to the original position of processing (main).

  If the BB signal or RB signal change command is not set in the step of Sk120, the external output control process is terminated as it is and returns to the original position of the timer interrupt process (main).

  As described above, the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment sets an output command for an external output signal in the startup process (main) or game process, and then interrupts and executes the startup process or game process. The output control of the external output signal is performed according to the output command set in the timer interrupt process (main).

  As a result, the number of bets used as a game start condition in the BET process is set, and the number of bets used for setting the number of bets for the game each time control for starting the game is performed by performing the game start operation. The control for outputting the medal IN signal is performed. Further, when medals are paid out in the payout process, control is performed to output medal OUT signals for the number of payout medals.

  The external device can identify RT2, that is, the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the ART signal, identify the number of medals consumed based on the medal IN signal, and based on the medal OUT signal. It becomes possible to specify the number of medals paid out. Further, since the medal IN signal is a signal that is output with the start of the game, the output of the medal IN signal can also be determined as the start of the game.

  Although the ART signal is output over 2000 ms at the shortest, the ART signal can be reliably detected even in an external device such as an old hallcon that requires a relatively long time to detect a gaming state signal. Since this time is longer than the time required for the player to perform the setting operation of the betting number as the game start condition after the game is finished and to start the game, the time from the start of the output of the ART signal If the player performs an operation for setting the number of bets serving as a game start condition until 2000 ms elapses, and the game start operation is performed to start the game, an ART signal and a medal are covered. An IN signal may be output. In particular, when shifting to RT2 when a special lip is won as in this embodiment, the number of bets in the next game is automatically performed. In such a case, the medals IN are covered with an ART signal. The possibility that a signal is output is further increased.

  When the ART signal and the medal IN signal are output, it can be reliably determined whether the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal is after the start of RT2 or before the start of RT2. There is a problem that it is not possible to specify whether the game specified by the medal IN signal is a game after the start of RT2 or a game before the start of RT2.

  In order to solve such a problem, a method of invalidating the betting number setting operation or the game starting operation of the next game until the end of the ART signal output period may be considered. However, although the output of the ART signal and the medal IN signal is not incurred, the progress of the game is delayed, and the bet number setting operation or the game start operation is invalidated, thereby There is also a possibility of giving a sense of incongruity.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, control for outputting an ART signal as an external output signal at the end of the game immediately before the start of RT2 is started, and the ART signal is output even when the ART signal is being output. As in the case where there is no game, the game is ended after outputting the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal according to the progress of the game.

  The ART signal is stopped at a specific timing that is not included in a predetermined period in which a medal IN signal or a medal OUT signal can be output, that is, a timing at which a newly started game ends after starting output. . Note that when the end of the game does not pass 2000 ms from the start of the ART signal output, as described above, there is a possibility that the signal cannot be reliably specified by the external device, so that the medal IN signal is output in the next game. The control is stopped at a predetermined timing that is not included in a predetermined period during which the medal IN signal or the medal OUT signal can be output.

  As a result, the external device, for example, specifies that it is controlled by RT2 when the output of the ART signal is stopped when it is not specified that it is RT2, and the end timing is the end of one game. The medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the finished game is determined as a medal in RT2, and when the end timing is the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is finished, The medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the current game and the previous game is determined as a medal in RT2.

  Here, the start timing and end timing of the ART signal output will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are timing charts when the next game is finished after 2000 ms has passed since the game control of the game that won the special lip is finished and the output of the ART signal is started. FIG. 12 shows a case where medals have been paid out in the next game.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the output of the ART signal is started when the game control of the game won in the special lip is completed. Thereafter, the game start operation of the next game is performed, and when the next game is newly started, the medal IN signal is output for a predetermined period. When the game control of the game ends, the ART signal Output ends. The period during which the medal IN signal is output is determined to be constant according to the number of medals bet. As shown in FIG. 11, the period during which the medal IN signal is output when the bet number is 3 is 25 × 5 = 125 ms.

  In FIG. 12, since the medal payout has occurred in the next game, the game control is ended after the medal OUT signal is output for a predetermined period. The period during which the medal OUT signal is output is determined to be constant according to the number of medals paid out. The period during which the medal OUT signal is output when the number of payouts is 8 is 25 × (8 + 7) = 375 ms, as shown in FIG. When a medal payout occurs in a game in which the output of the ART signal is stopped, after a period in which the medal OUT signal is output after all reels stop and after the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, The output of the ART signal is stopped.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart at the time when the next game ends after 2000 ms elapses after the game control of the game that won the special lip is ended and the output of the ART signal is started. The output of the ART signal does not end even if the next game newly started after the start of output ends, and after the game is started and the output of the medal IN signal for a predetermined period is completed, the ART signal is output. The output is finished.

  On the other hand, when returning to the state before the interruption of power when the power is turned on, when returning to the state during the output control of the ART signal, an output command of the ART signal is set before the return, and the ART signal is newly started from that point. Is output.

  For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, even after the slot machine 1 is turned on, the ART signal is output again even when the ART signal output control is resumed. The signal can be received reliably. FIG. 14 shows an example when the game is over after 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the ART signal output, and FIG. 15 shows the game before 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the ART signal output. Shows an example when is finished.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 15, when the slot machine 1 returns to the RT2 state after the power is turned on, the ART signal is output even when the RT2 is not started or ended. Even when the store is opened with the state remaining, the external device can be made to recognize the RT2 as today's RT2.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, when the next game is finished by 2000 ms after the output of the ART signal is started, the output of the medal IN signal in the game is successively performed. The example in which the output of the ART signal is stopped after completion has been described, but it is output during a period in which the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal cannot be output, and the timing to stop when 2000 ms or more has elapsed. The output of the ART signal may be stopped at any timing as long as the timing is different from (when the game control of the next game is finished in this embodiment). Further, when the next game is finished by 2000 ms after starting the output of the ART signal, as shown in FIG. 16, when 2000 ms has passed since the start of the output of the ART signal, The output of the ART signal may be stopped in a period during which the IN signal and the medal OUT signal cannot be output.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game to the sub control unit 91. A plurality of types of commands including a status command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command, setting command, setting confirmation command, operation detection command, rotation start command during freezing, and result command during freezing are transmitted.

  These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, whether or not a winning is received, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the winning. The winning determination is performed with all reels stopped. Sent after.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game and the type of RT, and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state. After the predetermined gaming state, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted, the reset operation is performed, and the stop state is released. At that time, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, a setting command that indicates the start of the setting change state is transmitted and A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The operation detection command is a switch in which the detection state (on / off) has changed among the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), whether the detection state has changed from off to on, This command indicates whether the switch has changed from on to off and the detection state (on / off) of another switch, and is transmitted when the detection state of any of these operation switches has changed.

  The freeze rotation start command and the freeze result command are commands transmitted during the freeze described later. During the freeze, the reel effect by the reels 2L to 2R is executed. As a reel effect during freezing, for example, after reel rotation control to rotate the reels 2L to 2R is executed, a result derivation control to stop in response to an operation on the stop switches 8L to 8R is executed, thereby causing a predetermined effect. An effect of stopping the symbol combination is executed. The rotation start command during freeze is a command transmitted when reel rotation control is started during freeze. The result command during freezing is a command transmitted when result control for deriving the result of the reel effect during freezing is started.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in the basic process, and the command data in the command buffer assigned to the non-initialized area is updated to the newly generated command data, and the serial communication circuit The data is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by being transferred to the transmission data register 561 of 511.

  The operation detection command is used when a change in the detection state of any switch is detected in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main) (when edge data of any switch is set). Is generated and stored in the operation detection command storage area, and when an operation detection command transmission request is set, transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command storage area is instructed, and a timer allocation executed thereafter In the command transmission process of the loading process (main), it is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There is a gamer. In addition, the winning combination includes a transition combination accompanied by a transition of the gaming state.

  In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 507 to win the internal lottery and allow the winning of the winning combination.

  FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41.

  Among the winning combinations, BB1 wins when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. Among the winning combinations, RB1 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  When winning BB1, it is controlled to a big bonus. While the gaming state is controlled to the big bonus, the BB signal is set in the RAM 41c. Further, while being controlled by the big bonus, the RB for BB in which the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination (for example, a small combination) is improved to a predetermined probability is controlled. While being controlled by the BB RB, the RB signal is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the BB signal is set in the RAM 41c, the game is controlled so that the RB signal is set every game. The big bonus generated due to the winning of BB1 ends on condition that 247 or more medals have been paid out.

  When winning RB1, a regular bonus is controlled. While the gaming state is controlled by the regular bonus, the RB signal is set in the RAM 41c. The regular bonus generated due to the winning of RB1 is terminated on condition that 5 games or any winning combination is won 5 times.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the gaming state is controlled by RT4 from when BB1 or RB1 is internally won until winning. Also, after BB1 or RB1 ends, the gaming state is controlled to RT0.

  Even if BB1 or RB1 is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will not win these roles. This is because the symbols ("red 7" and "BAR") constituting BB1 or RB1 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R.

Among the winning combinations, the replaying combinations include seven types of replaying combinations of Lips 1 to 7 shown in FIG.
Lip 1 is awarded when the combination of “lip a / lip b-lip a-lip a” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  In the description of the symbol combination in this embodiment, “/” indicates “or”, “−” indicates “adjacent reel separation”, the left indicates “the symbol of the left reel 2L”, and the middle. Indicates the “design of the middle reel 2C”, and the right indicates the “design of the right reel 2R”. Therefore, for example, it means a combination of two kinds of symbols, “lip a-lip a-lip a” and “lip b-lip a-lip a”.

  The lip 1 is also called a middle normal lip because the lip a or the lip b stops at least on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN.

  Lip 2 is awarded when the combination of “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / watermelon-orange / bell-bell” is aligned on the winning line LN. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, "Red 7-Orange-Bell", "Red 7-Bell-Bell", "White 7-Orange-Bell", "White 7-Bell-Bell", "BAR-Orange-" It means a combination of eight kinds of symbols, “bell”, “BAR-bell-bell”, “watermelon-orange-bell”, and “watermelon-bell-bell”.

  Lip 3 is awarded when the combination of “bell-lip a-lip a” is aligned on the winning line LN. As shown in FIG. 20A, after winning Lip 3 in RT1, it is controlled to RT3. When comparing RT1 and RT3, it can be said that RT1 is more advantageous for the player than RT3 in that it can win at least a special replay that triggers control of RT2. For this reason, the lip 3 is also called a fall lip.

  Lip 4 is awarded when the combination of “lip a / lip b-lip a-bell” is aligned on the winning line LN. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, it means a combination of two kinds of symbols, “lip a-lip a-bell” and “lip b-lip a-bell”. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), after winning the Lip 4 in RT3, the RT1 is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than RT3. For this reason, Lip 4 is also referred to as a promotion Lip.

  Lip 5 is awarded when the combination of “bell-lip a-bell” is aligned on the winning line LN. As shown in FIG. 20A, after winning the lip 5 in RT1, it is controlled to RT2, which is more advantageous for the player than RT1. As described above, the lip 5 is also referred to as a special lip.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, for the left reel 2L, the lip a or the lip b is arranged at a position below the bell, and for the right reel 2R, the lip a is arranged at a position one above the bell. Has been. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Lip 5 is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “Lip a / Lip b-Lip a-Lip a” rises to the right, that is, the symbol with the same or similar outer shape is aligned with the invalid line LM4 Become. On the other hand, when the lip 4 (promotion lip) wins, the same or similar external shape of the pattern does not appear on any line as when the lip 5 wins.

  For example, FIG. 20 (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the reel stop appearance at the time of winning a Lip 4 (promotional lip) winning the transition from RT3 to RT1.

  In FIG. 20B, the region numbers 8 to 10 of the left reel 2L are stopped, the region numbers 9 to 11 of the middle reel 2C are stopped, and the region numbers 9 to 11 of the right reel 2R are stopped. As a result, the symbol combination of the promotion lip “Lip a-Lip a-Bell” is stopped on the winning line LN. Here, in any of the invalid lines different from the winning line LN, a combination of symbols having the same outer shape or similar to the outer shape is not stopped.

  On the other hand, FIG. 20 (c) is a diagram for explaining an example of the reel stop output at the time of winning a Lip 5 (special lip) winning which is a trigger for the transition from RT1 to RT2. In FIG. 20C, the region numbers 14 to 16 of the left reel 2L are stopped, the region numbers 14 to 16 of the middle reel 2C are stopped, and the region numbers 6 to 8 of the right reel 2R are stopped. As a result, the special lip winning symbol combination of “BELL-LIP a-BELL” is stopped on the winning line LN. In addition, when a special lip is awarded, a combination of symbols “lip b-lip a-lip a” having the same outer shape and the similar outer shape is stopped on the invalid line LM4. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the special lip winning. Further, the special lip is a winning combination that is an opportunity to control RT2 which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the control has been made to RT2.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the lip 6 is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7 / lip a-white 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. The lip 6 is also called a middle lip 7 because it becomes a winning when the combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” stops in the winning line LN. The lip 6 can be won only at RT2. When the middle lip 7 is derived at RT2 and the lip 6 is won, the navigation stock described later is always given. .

  Lip 7 is awarded when the combination of “bell-white 7 / watermelon / cherry-red 7 / white 7 / orange / cherry” is aligned on the winning line LN. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, “Bell-White 7-Red 7”, “Bell-White 7-White 7”, “Bell-White 7-Orange”, “Bell-White 7-Cherry”, “Bell- "Watermelon-Red 7", "Bell-Watermelon-White 7", "Bell-Watermelon-Orange", "Bell-Watermelon-Cherry", "Bell-Cherry-Red 7", "Bell-Cherry-White 7", " It means a combination of twelve kinds of symbols, “bell-cherry-orange” and “bell-cherry-cherry”.

  The symbols constituting the lips 1 to 7 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, when one of the lips 1 to 7 is won in the internal lottery, as a rule, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the selected lip (if more than one lip is won, It can be said that it is a role that can win a prize. As will be described later, when a plurality of lips are won, reel control is performed so that the lip corresponding to the operation procedure wins.

  When winning one of Lips 1-7, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that need not be set in the next game This is essentially the same as when the medal is paid out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, the small roles include Bell 1, Bell 2, AT1, AT2, AT3, AT4, AT5, AT6, AT7, AT8, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Watermelon 1, Watermelon 2, One piece 1, One piece 2 , And 3 sheets.

  Bell 1 is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the winning line LN. Bell 1 is also called a middle bell because it becomes a winning when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” stops in the winning line LN.

  Bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “lip a / lip b-bell-lip a” is aligned on the winning line LN. Bell 2 is also referred to as a lower right bell because a winning combination is stopped when the symbol that is won in the winning line LN stops when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” stops in the invalid line LM3.

  The symbols constituting each of the bell 1 and the bell 2 are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, when the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won in the internal lottery, in principle, the winning bell 1 or the bell 2 can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R. I can say that.

  AT1 is awarded when the combination of “Lip a-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. AT2 is awarded when the combination of “Lip a-BAR-Cherry / Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. AT3 is awarded when the combination of “Lip a-Cherry-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. AT4 is awarded when a combination of “lip a-cherry-cherry / plum” is arranged on the winning line LN.

  AT5 is awarded when the combination of “Lip b-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. AT 6 is awarded when the combination of “Lip b-BAR-Cherry / Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. AT7 is awarded when the combination of “Lip b-Cherry-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. AT8 is awarded when the combination of “Lip b-Cherry-Cherry / Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN.

  AT1 to 8 are also referred to as upper bells because the winning combination is stopped by stopping the combination of “bell-bell-bell” on the invalid line LM1 when the winning symbol on the winning line LN stops.

  The symbols constituting each of AT1-8 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, even if one of AT1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing according to the type of AT selected among AT1 to AT8. Otherwise, you will not win the winning AT. When winning one of Bell 1, Bell 2, and AT1-8, 13 medals are paid out.

  Cherry 1 is awarded when the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” is aligned on the winning line LN. The cherry 1 is also referred to as a middle-stage cherry because the cherry on the left reel 2L is placed on the winning line LN.

  Cherry 2 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-ANY-red 7 / white 7 / orange / lip a” is aligned on the winning line LN. Each of the cherries 2 is also called a corner cherry because when the winning symbol on the winning line LN stops, the “cherry” of the left reel 2L stops at the lower stage and becomes a winning.

  Of the symbols constituting each of the cherries 1 and 2, the symbol of the left reel 2L is not arranged within five frames. Therefore, even if one of the cherries 1 and 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning cherry will not be won. When one of the cherries 1 and 2 is won, four medals are paid out.

  The watermelon 1 is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN. Therefore, the watermelon 1 is also referred to as a middle watermelon.

  The watermelon 2 is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Watermelon-BAR / Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. The watermelon 2 is also referred to as a lower right watermelon because the winning combination is stopped by stopping the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination in the invalid line LM3 when the winning symbol is stopped in the winning line LN.

  The symbols constituting each of the watermelons 1 and 2 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, even if one of the watermelons 1 and 2 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are set at an appropriate timing according to the type of the watermelon selected among the watermelons 1 and 2. If you do not operate, you will not win the winning watermelon. When one of the watermelons 1 and 2 is won, ten medals are paid out.

  One piece 1 is awarded when the combination of “orange-orange-orange / lip a” is arranged on the winning line LN. One piece 2 is awarded when the combination of “red 7-BAR-orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. One piece 3 is awarded when the combination of “red 7-orange-orange” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  The symbols constituting each of the sheets 1 to 3 are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, even if one of the sheets 1 to 3 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switch 8L at an appropriate timing according to the winning combination of one of the sheets 1 to 3, If the 8C and 8R are not operated, the winning single winning combination will not be won. When one of the sheets 1 to 3 is won, one medal is paid out.

  Next, the transition outcome will be described. The transition roll is won in the game in which the AT 1 to 8 of the small roles are won (winned in any of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4 and the right bell 1 to 4 described later). When none of the winning combinations can be generated (in the case of missing), it is a specific off-line symbol combination that stops at the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the transition items include a bell removal spill 1, a bell removal spill 2, and a bell removal spill 3. Bell removal 1 is a symbol combination in which “Lip a / Lip b-BAR / Cherry-Bell” is stopped on the winning line LN. Bell removal 2 is a symbol combination in which “Lip a / Lip b-Bell-BAR / Cherry / Plum” is stopped on the winning line LN. Bell removal 3 is a symbol combination in which “watermelon-BAR / cherry-BAR / cherry-plum” is stopped on the winning line LN.

  Bell removal 1 is stopped when the winning combination in the internal lottery is a right bell, which will be described later, and a winning cannot be generated. Also, the bell removal spill 2 is stopped when the winning combination in the internal lottery is a middle bell to be described later and no winning can be generated. Also, the bell removal spill 3 is stopped when a winning combination in the internal lottery is a left bell described later and a winning cannot be generated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, in RT0, RT1, and RT2, any winnings are not generated, and after the transition is stopped, the RT3 is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23, the lottery target combination read in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of the lottery target combination, and the reel control in the game winning the lottery target combination will be described. In this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state is RT0 to RT4, RB, or BB, the winning combination and the winning probability thereof are different. In FIG. 21 to FIG. 23, the vertical column indicates the types of the lottery target roles that can be read out by the internal lottery, and the horizontal column indicates the combination of winning combinations for each lottery target role, the gaming state to be selected, The contents of the reel control are also shown.

  The lottery target combination is provided with an internal lottery for only one winning combination and an internal lottery for a plurality of winning combinations at the same time. The internal lottery corresponding to the lottery target combination is shown in the winning combination column.

  In the gaming state column corresponding to the lottery target role, a circle indicates that the lottery target role is read out in the internal lottery when the gaming state is in effect, and an x symbol indicates the internal state when the gaming state is in effect. This indicates that the lottery target combination is not read in the lottery.

  Moreover, the numerical value shown below (circle) shows the number of judgment values. An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” in correspondence with a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “256” is set as the number of determination values is 256/65536. In the internal lottery, if no winning lottery is won, the game is lost.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the gaming state is RT0, BB1, BB1 + lip, BB1 + strongest cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one 2, BB1 + weak one 3, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak watermelon, RB1, RB1 + lip, RB1 + strongest cherry, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + weak cherry, RB1 + strong one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one 3, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak watermelon, strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1 to 4, middle bells 1 to 4, right bells 1 to 4, and lip are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT1, BB1, BB1 + Lip, BB1 + strongest cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + strong Watermelon, BB1 + weak watermelon, RB1, RB1 + lip, RB1 + strongest cherry, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + weak cherry, RB1 + strong one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak watermelon, strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, The right bells 1 to 4 and the 3 choice lips 1 to 6 are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT2, BB1, BB1 + Lip, BB1 + strongest cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + strong Watermelon, BB1 + weak watermelon, RB1, RB1 + lip, RB1 + strongest cherry, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + weak cherry, RB1 + strong one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak watermelon, strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, The right bells 1 to 4, the lip, the 7-set lip, and the 7 listening lip are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT3, BB1, BB1 + Lip, BB1 + strongest cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + weak one, BB1 + strong Watermelon, BB1 + weak watermelon, RB1, RB1 + lip, RB1 + strongest cherry, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + weak cherry, RB1 + strong one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + weak one, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak watermelon, strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, The right bells 1 to 4, the lip, and the 6-option lips 1 to 6 are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT4, strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1-4, middle bell 1 to 4, right bells 1 to 4, lip, and 6-option lip 1 and 2 are sequentially read out as subject combinations for internal lottery.

  In any game state of RT0 to RT4, the strongest cherry, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong one, weak one 1, weak one 2, weak one 3, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, left bell 1-4 The middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 are determined as lottery targets, and a common number of determination values is determined regardless of the gaming state. That is, the winning probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery is constant regardless of the gaming state. Note that the winning probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery may be determined so as to differ depending on the set value.

  Moreover, when comparing the number of determination values of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4, the left bell 1 to 4 is smaller than the middle bell 1 to 4 and the right bell 1 to 4, The winning probability is set to be low.

  In addition, when comparing the number of judgment values of weak one to three, strong one, weak watermelon, and strong watermelon, each of them is stronger than the lottery target roles (weak one, weak watermelon) with “weak” attached. The lottery target roles (strong one, strong watermelon) marked with "" are smaller and the winning probability is set lower. Also, when comparing the number of judgment values of weak cherry, strong cherry, and strongest cherry, the strong cherry is smaller than the weak cherry, the strongest cherry is smaller than the strong cherry, and the winning probability is set to be low. Yes.

  Hereinafter, the weak cherry, the strong cherry, and the strongest cherry are collectively referred to as “cherry”, and the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are collectively referred to as “push order bell”. For example, “cherry winning” means that one of the weak cherries, strong cherries, or strongest cherries has been won. Pushing bell winning means that the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, the right bells 1-4. Means that one of them has been elected.

  As will be described later, AT lottery is performed when weak cherry, strong cherry, strongest cherry is won, AT winning with higher probability than strong cherry winning than AT strong cherry winning, At the time of winning the strongest cherry, the AT is won with a higher probability. In addition, when a strong watermelon is won, an AT is won with the same probability as when the strongest cherry was won. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the strong cherry over the weak cherry and winning the strongest cherry or strong watermelon over the strong cherry.

  Next, the judgment value numbers of Lip, 6-choice Lip 1-6, 3-choice Lip 1-6, 7-match Lip, and 7-Hearing Lip are compared for each gaming state. The probability of winning one of the regame players is the highest in RT2, and then the number of determination values is set so that RT1, RT3, and RT4 are lower than RT2 with substantially the same probability.

  Further, when the number of determination values of the lip in RT2 is compared with the 7th lip and the 7th listening lip, the 7th lip and the 7th hearing lip are smaller than the lip, and the winning probability is set lower. Among them, 7 rips are set to win with extremely low probability. Further, in the present embodiment, when a lip 6 having white 7 symbols wins when winning 7 rips, the navigation stock described later is always given. Therefore, during RT2, it is possible to have a sense of expectation and a feeling of premiere for winning 7 rips.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 23, when the gaming state is RB, the RB left bell and the RB right bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is BB, all the combinations, BB combination 1 to 3 and BB combination listening kits 1 to 3 are sequentially read out as an internal lottery target combination.

  Next, the contents of the reel control will be described. Control for stopping the winning combination determined according to the type of winning winning combination (winning winning combination) and the operating procedure of the stop switches 8L to 8R in the winning line in a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Done.

  When one of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 is elected, the reel on which the stop operation is first performed (the first stopped reel) is the left reel. Depending on whether the reel is 2L, middle reel 2C, or right reel 2R, control is performed so that bell 1 or bell 2 is aligned and stopped within the draw range of up to four frames on the winning line.

  When the left bell 1 is won and the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, control is performed to stop the bell 2 in the winning small role in alignment with the winning line LN. On the other hand, when the left bell 1 is elected and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the control of stopping the AT1 or AT4 among the selected small roles on the winning line LN within the drawable range. To do. As described above, the symbols constituting AT1 and AT4 are not arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, respectively. Therefore, when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is stopped at an appropriate timing according to either AT1 or AT4, the corresponding AT1 or AT4 can be won, but the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing. In some cases, a control is performed to stop the bell removal 3 in the transition line from being aligned with the winning line LN without winning.

  Similarly, in the game in which any of the left bells 2 to 4 is won, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the control for stopping the bell 2 in the winning small role in line with the winning line LN is stopped. To do. On the other hand, when any of the left bells 2 to 4 is won and the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the ATs of the selected small roles are aligned on the winning line LN within the drawable range. Control to stop. As described above, none of the symbols constituting the AT are arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, each stop switch 8L to 8R can win the corresponding AT when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing according to the winning AT, but if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, a prize is awarded. Instead, the control is performed to stop the bell removal spillage 3 on the payout line LN out of the transition outcomes.

  The same applies when one of the middle bells 1 to 4 or the right bells 1 to 4 is won. In other words, if the first stop reel in the game that is elected to any of the middle bells 1 to 4 is the middle reel 2C, the symbol combination of the bell 1 of the elected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN. If it is a reel other than the middle reel 2C, the winning combination of AT 1 to 8 is pulled to the winning line LN within the drawable range and stopped. When the AT symbol combination currently being drawn cannot be pulled into the winning line LN and stopped, the bell removal 2 of the transition points is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  Further, when the first stop reel in the game in which any of the right bells 1 to 4 is won is the right reel 2R, the symbol combination of the bell 1 among the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN. If the reel is a reel other than the right reel 2R, the winning combination of AT 1 to 8 is pulled into the winning line LN within the drawable range and stopped. If the AT symbol combination currently being drawn cannot be pulled into the winning line LN and stopped, the bell removal 1 of the transition points is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  As described above, when one of the left bells 1 to 4 is won, reel control is performed so as to surely win the bell 2 when the left reel 2L is first stopped. When the first stop is performed, the reel control is performed so that the winning AT is awarded only when the pull-in is possible, and when the pull-in is not possible, all the winning ATs are dropped and the transition outcome is derived.

  When one of the middle bells 1 to 4 is won, reel control is performed so that the bell 1 is surely won when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time. When it is stopped, the reel control is performed so that the winning AT is won only when the pull-in is possible, and when the pull-in is impossible, all of the ATs are dropped out, and the transition outcome is derived.

  When one of the right bells 1 to 4 is won, reel control is performed so that the bell 1 is surely won when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time. When it is stopped, the reel control is performed so that the winning AT is won only when the pull-in is possible, and when the pull-in is impossible, all of the ATs are dropped out, and the transition outcome is derived.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first stop reel for surely winning the bell 1 or 2 is made different depending on whether the left bell is won, the middle bell is won, or the right bell is won. Thus, the operation procedure for winning (a winning operation procedure) and the operation procedure for avoiding the derivation of the shift outcome can be made different.

  As described above, the winning probability of the left bell is set to be lower than that of the middle bell and the right bell. Further, as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is disadvantageous for the player when the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time when the effect state is not AT and the navigation effect is not executed. It is designed to stop the left reel 2L for the first time by taking a predetermined penalty. For this reason, it is difficult to reliably win the bell when not winning the AT, particularly when the middle bell or the right bell is won. Therefore, if the AT ends and is controlled to be non-AT at RT1, the transition outcome is stopped with a high probability, and it is difficult to maintain the RT1. On the other hand, when the performance state is AT, or when the navigation effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a penalty is not imposed by not stopping the left reel 2L for the first time. By stopping operation according to the navigation procedure according to the navigation effect when winning the right bell, it is possible to win the bell reliably and avoid falling to RT3 even if the gaming state is RT1 or RT2. Can be made.

  Next, reel control when a cherry is won will be described. First, when the weak cherry is won, the reel control is performed so that the cherry 2 is awarded when the “cherry” of the left reel 2L is stopped at a timing that allows the cherry to be pulled down. When the “cherry” cannot be pulled down, reel control for dropping the cherry 2 (reel control that does not pull “cherry” into the middle or upper stage) is performed. In the game where the weak cherries are won for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the “cherry” of the middle reel 2C is not stopped at either the middle or lower stage, and the “cherry” of the right reel 2R is raised or lowered. The reel control is performed so as not to stop any of them. For this reason, even when winning the cherry 2 by winning the weak cherry, two or more “cherries” are not stopped on the invalid line LM2 or the invalid line LM4. The fact that only one “cherry” is stopped on one line is hereinafter referred to as “single cherry”.

  In addition, when the strong cherry or the strongest cherry is won, the reel control is performed so that the cherry 1 is awarded when the “cherry” of the left reel 2L is stopped at a timing at which it can be pulled into the middle stage. When the “cherry” cannot be pulled into the middle stage, the reel control is performed so that the cherry 2 is awarded when the “cherry” is stopped at a timing at which the “cherry” can be pulled into the lower stage. The reel control is performed so that the cherry 1 and the cherry 2 are missed if the cherry cannot be pulled into.

  In the game where the strong cherry is won, the reel control of stopping the “cherry” of the middle reel 2C at the middle or lower level or stopping the “cherry” of the right reel 2R at the upper or lower level may be performed. For this reason, when the strong cherry is won, two “cherries” can be stopped on the invalid line LM2 or the invalid line LM4, but “cherry” is displayed on both the invalid line LM2 and the invalid line LM4. ”Is not stopped. The fact that two “cherries” are stopped on one line but not three is also referred to as “double cherries” below.

  On the other hand, in a game in which the strongest cherry is elected, reel control can be performed in which “cherry” of the middle reel 2C is stopped at the middle and lower stages, and “cherry” of the right reel 2R is stopped at the upper or lower stage. For this reason, when the strongest cherry is won, three “cherries” can be stopped on the invalid line LM2 or the invalid line LM4. The stop of three “cherries” on one line is also referred to as “triple cherries” below.

  In the game where one of the weak cherries, the strong cherries, and the strongest cherries is selected and the BB or RB is also selected, if the selected cherries are missed, the selected BB or Reel control for pulling in the RB within a pullable range is performed.

  In a game in which one to three weak ones are won, reel control is performed to stop a predetermined weak chance that is different from the transition outcome among combinations of outlier symbols. Further, in a game that is won by a strong one, reel control is performed to stop a predetermined strong chance eye that is different from the transition outcome and the weak chance eye among the combinations of outlier symbols. Opportunity is not only when you miss a weak or strong one, but also reel control so that you can stop when you miss a weak cherry, strong cherry, strongest cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, etc. It is.

  In a game where a weak watermelon is won, watermelon 2 is given priority over the watermelon 1 within the drawable range and drawn into the winning line LN, the lower right watermelon is stopped, and the watermelon 2 cannot be drawn. Since 1 cannot be pulled in, reel control is performed to stop the weak chance or strong chance mentioned above.

  In a game where a strong watermelon is won, watermelon 1 is given priority over watermelon 2 in the pull-in range and drawn into the winning line LN, the middle watermelon is stopped, and if watermelon 1 cannot be pulled in, watermelon 2 is used. When the watermelon 2 cannot be pulled in, the reel control is performed to stop the above-mentioned weak chance eyes or strong chance eyes.

  Further, in a game in which a lip is won, a control for winning lip 1 or lip 2 is performed according to whether or not the first stopped reel is the left reel 2L. In the case of the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R other than the left reel 2L, reel control for winning the lip 2 is performed.

  In a game that is elected to the 6-option Lip 1, if the left reel 2L is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, among the selected re-game players, Reel control is performed to stop the four symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN, and when the operation is stopped by an operation procedure other than these, the reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  In a game in which 6-option Lip 2 is won, if the left reel 2L is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C, Reel control is performed to stop the four symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN, and when the operation is stopped by an operation procedure other than these, the reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  In a game that is elected to the 6-option lip 3, if the middle reel 2C is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, the rep Reel control is performed to stop the four symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN, and when the operation is stopped by an operation procedure other than these, the reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  In a game in which the 6-option Lip 4 is won, if the middle reel 2C is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the right reel 2R and the left reel 2L, Reel control is performed to stop the four symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN, and when the operation is stopped by an operation procedure other than these, the reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  In a game in which 6-option lip 5 is won, if the right reel 2R is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, When reel control is performed to stop the 4 symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN, the right reel 2R is stopped first, and then the middle reel 2C and the left reel 2L are stopped in this order. Among the winning combinations, reel control for stopping the combination of symbols of Lip 2 on the winning line LN is performed, and when stopped by an operation procedure other than these, reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  In a game in which the 6-option lip 6 is won, if the right reel 2R is stopped first and then stopped in the order of the middle reel 2C and the left reel 2L, the rep When reel control is performed to stop the 4 symbol combinations in line with the winning line LN, the right reel 2R is stopped first, and then the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are stopped in this order. Among the winning combinations, reel control for stopping the combination of symbols of Lip 2 on the winning line LN is performed, and when stopped by an operation procedure other than these, reel control for winning Lip 1 is performed.

  As described above, the operation procedure for winning the Lip 4 which is the promoted Lip can be varied depending on which of the 6-select Lips 1 to 6 is won.

  Here, when it is RT3, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the probability of winning the 6-choice lips 1 and 2 in which the promotion lip wins is 0%. In this embodiment, the left reel 2L is designed to stop for the first time during non-AT. Therefore, during the non-AT, the promotion lip cannot be won, and the player plays the game at RT3 until controlled by the AT without shifting to RT1.

  When winning the 3rd choice lip 1, if the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of symbols of the lip 4 in the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  When winning the 3rd choice lip 2, when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of symbols of the lip 4 in the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  When winning the 3rd choice lip 3, if the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of the symbols of the rip 4 in the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  When winning the 3 choice lip 4, if the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of the symbols of the lip 5 in the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  When winning the 3rd choice lip 5, if the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of symbols of the lip 5 in the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  When winning the 3rd choice lip 6, if the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed to stop the combination of the symbols of the lip 5 on the winning line LN among the selected re-game players. When the others are stopped for the first time, reel control for winning the lip 3 is performed.

  In this way, the operation procedure for winning Lip 4 or Lip 3 can be made different depending on which of the three-choice lips 1-3 is won. Further, depending on which of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the operation procedure for winning the replay 5 (special lip) or replay 3 accompanied by the transition to RT2 can be varied.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to stop the left reel 2L for the first time during non-AT. For this reason, if you win 3rd choice Lip 1 or 3rd choice Lip 4 when you are not in AT, you can avoid falling lip winning, but you can effectively avoid falling lip winning when you win other 3 choice lip. Even if it is controlled to RT1 during non-AT, it becomes difficult to maintain RT1. On the other hand, when the navigation effect is executed when the performance state is AT or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a penalty is not imposed by not stopping the left reel 2L for the first time. By performing the stop operation according to the operation procedure in accordance with the navigation effect at, it is possible to reliably avoid the falling lip winning and to maintain the control to RT1.

  In addition, as described above, when one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, according to the order of the stop operation, the replay 5 (special lip) accompanied by the transition to RT2 is awarded. Control for winning the replay 3 accompanied by the transition to RT3 is performed.

  In the internal lottery, when the 3rd selection lip 4-6 is won and the special lip is won, a freeze that delays the progress of the game by not effectively accepting the operation of the stop switches 8L-8R for a predetermined period. Controlled by the state.

  When winning the 7th lip, the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, and when aiming at the white 7 symbol, the reel control is performed so that the symbol combination of the lip 6 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. In addition, when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, but the white 7 symbol is not aimed, reel control is performed so that the symbol combination of the lip 7 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. Further, when the parts other than the right reel 2R are stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the symbol combination of Lip 1 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. In this embodiment, the navigation stock is always given when the lip 6 is won.

  In the case of winning 7 listening lip, when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the symbol combination of the lip 7 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped, and when the other is stopped for the first time, the lip is Reel control for winning 1 is performed.

  When the gaming state is BB, reel control is performed to align the symbol combination of the bell 1 with the winning line LN and stop regardless of which combination is won.

  When the RB left bell is won, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that any symbol combination of AT1 to 8 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If it is made, the reel control for winning any one of the bell removals 1 to 3 is performed.

  When the RB right bell is elected, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, reel control is performed so that any combination of symbols of the bell removals 1 to 3 is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When one stop is performed, reel control is performed to win any one of AT1 to AT8.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery for the lottery target combination corresponding to the gaming state, performs reel control according to the lottery result and the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L to 8R, and pays out medals according to the display result. And game state transition. Further, the main control unit 41 transmits a command to the effect control board 90 according to the progress of the game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20A again, the flow of the game will be described together. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, after the setting change state is finished or the bonus is finished, it is controlled to RT0. At RT0, the navigation effect is not executed without being controlled by the AT. As described above, since the navigation effect is not executed at RT0, it is highly probable when winning at any one of left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, and right bell 1-4 at RT0. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the bells and ATs are missed and the transitional points are stopped on the winning line LN, and the transitional points are not stopped and are not shifted to RT3 indefinitely. In RT1 to RT4, the flow of the game is as described below depending on whether or not AT is in progress.

  First, the flow of the game when not in AT will be described. As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed so that the left reel 2L is first stopped when the AT is not being performed. For this reason, when the player is not in the AT, the player performs a stop operation so as to stop the left reel 2L for the first time. As a result, the game flow is as follows.

  In RT3, the player moves to RT1 by winning a lip 4 (promotion lip). In order to win the Lip 4, as shown in FIG. 22, it is necessary to stop the operation procedure for winning one of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6 and making the promoted lip winning.

  However, the winning probability of the 6-choice lips 1 and 2 for winning the promotion lip when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time is 0%. Furthermore, since the left reel 2L is designed to stop first during non-AT, there is no possibility of shifting to RT1 unless AT is performed.

  Next, the flow of the game during the AT will be described. In RT3, when any one of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6 is won, a navigation effect for specifying an operation procedure for winning the lip 4 is executed. For this reason, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, it is possible to shift to RT1 by Lip 4 winning.

  In RT1, a navigation effect for specifying an operation procedure for winning a lip 4 is executed when one of the three choice lips 1 to 3 is won. For this reason, RT1 can be maintained by Lip 4 winning by performing stop operation according to a navigation effect.

  Further, in RT1, when any of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, a navigation effect for specifying an operation procedure for winning a lip 5 (special lip) is executed. Therefore, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, it is possible to shift to RT2 by Lip 5 winning.

  If the AT is terminated and controlled to non-AT in RT1, the navigation effect will not be executed even if one of the three-choice lips 1 to 6 is won. Therefore, when the lip 3 wins, the transition is made to RT3. End up.

  In RT2, the navigation effect for specifying the operation procedure for winning the lip 6 is executed when the 7-piece lip is won. More specifically, for example, a navigation effect that notifies that the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time and that the white 7 symbols are aligned is executed. For this reason, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, the navigation stock can be given by the Lip 6 winning.

  In RT2, the same navigation effect is executed when winning the 7-listening lip when winning the 7-listening lip. Here, when a 7-listening lip is won, a normal replay such as lip 1 or lip 7 wins regardless of whether or not the operation procedure is followed. In this way, even if a 7-listening lip is won. By performing the navigation effect, it is possible to make the player think that he may have won 7 rips, and to improve his expectation for the game. In addition, although the winning probability of 7-set lip is low and rarely wins, in this way, by performing a navigation effect on 7 listening lip, the player has an opportunity to expect to give navigation stock You can make a lot.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the navigation effect is executed so that it is controlled by RT2 and maintained at RT2 when it is in AT. Most of the games will be digested at RT2. In the present embodiment, the state controlled by the AT in the RT 2 that is advantageous to the player is particularly referred to as an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as ART).

  Further, the AT in this embodiment is 50 games for one set (consuming one navigation stock). In RT1 during AT, whether or not the internal winning result is a specific result (in this embodiment, winning 3 choice lips 4 to 6 is won), whether or not the lip 5 (special lip) is won. First, an AT start effect for notifying that the counting of 50 games is started is executed. When the control is performed by the AT at RT2, the AT start effect is executed immediately after the control by the AT.

  Further, when the transition from RT3 during AT to RT1 is performed, a message image such as “a little more until RT2” is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51, whereas when the transition from RT1 during AT to RT2 is performed, an AT start effect is produced. The background image in the liquid crystal display 51 is also changed.

  Regardless of whether the player is an AT or not, when a cherry is won, an effect reminiscent of the cherry win is executed. For example, when a cherry is won, a message image “Aim for cherry!” Is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. Regardless of whether it is AT or not, when a watermelon is won, an effect reminiscent of watermelon winning is executed. For example, when a watermelon is won, a message image “Aim for watermelon!” Is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. Thereby, the possibility of losing cherries and watermelons can be reduced.

  Further, in the game process executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment, after the internal lottery is performed in the internal lottery process in Sd2, processes related to freeze (freeze effect lottery process and freeze related process) are performed. .

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the bonus is won, the game after the weak cherry winning game, or when the push order bell is won, the frozen state is controlled for a predetermined period. An effect to be performed (hereinafter also referred to as a freeze effect) is performed. When controlled to the freeze state, after the reels 2L to 2R start rotating, the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R, and the AT is selected and navigated according to the outcome. Reel production is performed to suggest that stock has been acquired and that an AT lottery will be held.

  It is also referred to as a temporary display result for an outcome that is stopped in the reel production. The temporary display result may be an outcome that does not advance the game by being stopped, for example, an outcome that does not end one game by being stopped but also generates an award. not. In the present embodiment, the temporary display result that can be stopped during the freeze and the display result that can be stopped during the normal time that is not frozen are the same in the number of symbol combinations and the number of types of the symbol combinations. The temporary display result that can be stopped during freezing is not limited to this, and may include many combinations of display results that can be stopped during normal times that are not frozen. The number of types included in the symbol combination of the display result that can be stopped in FIG. 5 may be small, or may be different from the symbol combination of the display result that can be stopped in a normal time that is not frozen. Further, the mode in which the temporary display result is stopped during the freezing may be the same mode as the mode in which the display result is stopped during the normal time during the freezing.

  Further, the mode until the temporary display result is stopped during the freeze is a mode different from the mode until the display result is stopped at the normal time when the freeze is not performed. For example, in this embodiment, the reel rotation control when starting the reel effect is performed in the same manner as the reel control in the normal time when the reel effect is not being performed. On the other hand, the opportunity to stop the turn is that any of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated in the reel production, whereas in the normal time, it is an operation of all the stop switches 8L to 8R. The maximum number of frames that can be drawn in is not limited in reel production, but is normally limited to a predetermined number of frames. The control is performed in a manner different from the control for stopping the turning. It should be noted that the reel rotation control when starting the reel effect may be performed in a mode different from the normal reel control during freezing (for example, rotating in the opposite direction to normal during freezing) Further, the control for stopping the turn in the reel effect may be performed in the same manner as the control for stopping the turn in the normal time when the reel is not frozen.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining a freeze effect lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect. The freeze effect lottery process is a process executed when the main control unit 41 is in a gaming state other than during the bonus, and is executed, for example, at the start of the game. More specifically, the freeze effect lottery process is not during the bonus, and is included in the internal lottery process in the game process, and is executed after the internal lottery is completed. The freeze effect lottery process is not limited to that executed at the start of the game, but may be executed at the end of the game, at the BET, or at a predetermined timing during reel rotation.

  In Se1, it is determined whether or not any bonus is won (including the bonus winning in the internal lottery at the start of the current game). Whether or not the bonus is won is specified based on the bonus winning flag. If it is determined that one of the bonuses has been won in Se1, whether or not the immediately preceding ceiling flag indicating that the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling is within 30 games and is approaching the ceiling is set in Se2 Is determined. Processing for setting the flag just before the ceiling will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When it is determined in Se2 that the flag just before the ceiling is not set, in Bonus, the bonus continuous effect executed when the bonus winning or the predetermined condition is satisfied is terminated, and a notification that the bonus has been won (hereinafter referred to as “bonus winning”). It is determined whether or not a definite notification flag indicating that it has been determined is set. The process for setting the confirmed notification flag will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined in Se3 that the confirmed notification flag is not set, a freeze lottery is performed in Se4 to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect, and the process proceeds to Se5. In Se5, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the freeze effect in the freeze lottery in Se4. When it is not determined to execute the freeze effect, the process proceeds to Se6, and when it is determined to execute the freeze effect, the freeze effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at Se2 that the flag just before the ceiling is set, or when it is determined at Se3 that the confirmed / notified flag is set, it is when it is determined at Se1 that the bonus is being won. However, the freeze effect lottery process is terminated without executing the freeze lottery in Se4. As a result, when the player recognizes that the game will reach the ceiling and 10 navigation stocks will be awarded by digesting several more games, or when the player has already recognized that a bonus has been won In addition, the execution of the freeze effect can be prohibited.

  Even if it is determined that the bonus is not won in Se1, and even if it is determined that the bonus is won in Se1, it is not close to the ceiling and the confirmed notification flag is not set and the freeze effect is executed. If it is not decided, whether or not the current game is the next game after the game that won the weak cherry alone, not at the same time as the bonus (hereinafter also referred to as “the next game after the weak cherry alone”). Is judged.

  When it is determined in Se6 that the current game is the next game after the weak cherry single win, it is determined in Se7 whether or not the flag just before the ceiling is set. If it is determined in Se7 that the flag just before the ceiling is not set, is the strong watermelon continuous effect flag indicating that the strong watermelon continuous effect is executed in response to the strong watermelon winning in Se8? It is determined whether or not. Processing for setting the strong watermelon continuous effect flag will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in Se8 that the strong watermelon continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to Se9, a freeze lottery is performed, and the freeze effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the flag just before the ceiling is set at Se7, or when it is determined at Se8 that the flag for continuous production for strong watermelon is set, it is determined at Se6 that the game is the next game after winning the weak cherry alone. Even when it is done, the freeze effect lottery process is terminated without executing the freeze lottery at Se9.

  Further, when it is determined in Se6 that the current game is not the next game after the weak cherry single winning, the process proceeds to Se6a, and it is determined whether or not the push-bell winning is won in the current game. In Se6a, if it is determined that the push order bell is won, the processing after Se7 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell is not won, the freeze effect lottery process is terminated. As described above, when the player recognizes that by executing the processes of Se7 and Se8, the game will reach the ceiling and 10 navigation stocks will be awarded by digesting several games, the advantage is high. When the player recognizes that a strong watermelon winning in which an AT lottery is performed is performed, it is possible to prohibit execution of a freeze effect triggered by a weak cherry winning or a push-bell winning.

  The Se9 freeze lottery is performed when it is determined that the bonus is not won in Se1 and after it is determined that the bonus is won in Se1, and the confirmed notification flag is set in Se3. It is when it is determined that it is not. On the other hand, as will be described later, the AT lottery is not performed during the bonus winning, and no navigation stock is given even if the AT lottery condition is satisfied. As described above, when the player has been informed that the navigation stock is not provided even if the AT lottery condition is satisfied, it is determined as YES in Se3, so that the bonus winning or the weak cherry winning etc. As a trigger, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the freeze effect.

  In the freeze lottery in Se4 and Se9 in FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not to execute the freeze, and if it is determined to execute the freeze, it is determined which type of reel effect is executed during the freeze. Is done. In the freeze lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the freeze with reference to the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 25. If it is determined to execute the freeze, the reel effect type lottery table shown in FIG. The type of reel effect to be executed is determined with reference to the cherry appearance frequency determination table shown in FIG.

  First, the freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The freeze lottery table is determined so that the execution probability of this freeze lottery differs depending on whether the bonus is being won, weak cherry alone, or push-bell winning. ing.

  In the freezing lottery during the bonus winning, that is, the freezing lottery in Se4 of FIG. 24, the probability that the freezing will be executed is 20%, and the probability that the freezing will not be executed is 80%. For this reason, it is set to increase the possibility that the freeze is executed one or more times after the bonus is won and five games are consumed. In addition, after a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of freezing occurs during the bonus winning, the freezing lottery may not be performed after the bonus winning.

  Further, in the freeze lottery triggered by the weak cherry alone, the probability that the freeze is executed is 50%, and the probability that the freeze is not executed is 50%. Also, in the freeze lottery triggered by the pushing order bell winning, the probability that the freeze is executed is 0.5%, and the probability that the freeze is not executed is 99.5%.

  Next, the reel effect type lottery table and the cherry appearance frequency determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. The reel effect type lottery table is determined so that the allocation rate differs according to the freeze lottery opportunity and the appearance frequency (derivation status) of the cherry when the freeze lottery opportunity is a weak cherry win.

  Further, as types of reel effects during freezing, as shown in FIG. 26, there are provided a push order effect, a centering effect, a two-stage effect, and a cherry effect. The contents of the reel effect will be briefly described below. In the push order effect, the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in the normal state, and the winning order that suggests the acquisition of navigation stock by the push order for the stop switches 8L to 8R matches the predetermined order (push order correct answer) ( For example, “777”) is stopped, and the pressing order does not agree with the predetermined order (incorrect pressing order), and this is an effect that gives the impression that the winning eye has not been stopped.

  The main effect is that the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in normal times, and that the winning eye that suggests the acquisition of navigation stock by the operation timing for the stop switches 8L to 8R matches the predetermined timing (successful pressing) It is an effect that gives the impression that the winning eye was not stopped due to the fact that it was stopped and the operation timing did not match the predetermined timing (failed to press).

  In the two-stage effect, the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in the normal state, and the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R is once stopped by the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R, and then the rotation is started again. Later, it refers to an effect that gives a sense of expectation whether or not the winning eye suggesting the acquisition of Navistock will be stopped.

  The cherry effect is an effect that is performed when the next game after winning the weak cherry alone is started, and the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in the normal time, and the operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R is performed. Thus, it is an effect that gives a sense of expectation whether or not the double cherries that can be derived at the time of winning the strong cherry and the triple cherries that can be derived at the time of winning the strongest cherry will be stopped.

  As described above, the reel effects such as the push order effect, the eye-press effect, the two-stage effect, and the cherry effect are controlled during the freeze, so even if the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated, the game is performed. However, by starting the reel rotation in the same manner as the reel control performed in the normal reel rotation process shown by Sd3 in FIG. 9, the player is prompted to operate the stop switches 8L to 8C. It can be said that this is an effect of performing a pseudo game in order to stop the game according to the operation.

  In addition, since the reel effects such as the push order effect, the eye push effect, the two-stage effect, and the cherry effect are performed during the reel rotation, the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as the normal time. It is impossible to specify the difference from the reel control at the time, and a mode different from the reel control at the normal time (for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L to 8C is operated, the reel rotation is stopped and the output stops and the pull-in piece is stopped). It is possible to notify that the reel effect during freezing can be specified by stopping the game with no limit in number).

  When the freeze is executed with the weak cherry single winning as a trigger, the reel effect type lottery table of any of FIGS. 26A to 26C is referred to, and the freeze is executed with the push order bell winning as a trigger. 26 (d), the reel effect type lottery table is referred to, and when the freeze is executed when the bonus is being won, the reel effect type lottery in FIG. 26 (e) is used. A table is referenced.

  In addition, when the freeze is executed with the weak cherry alone winning as an opportunity, one of the reel effect type lottery tables shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C is referred to according to the appearance frequency of the cherry. The The appearance of cherry means that cherry 1 or cherry 2 actually wins.

  The appearance frequency of cherries will be described with reference to FIG. As items for determining the appearance frequency of cherry, “appearance rate” and “number of digested games since previous appearance” are defined as shown in FIG. “Appearance rate” refers to the rate at which cherries have appeared during the consumption of a predetermined number of games (for example, a period after power-on, or a period of 1000 games, etc.). This is the number of games that have been digested since the last (most recent) cherry appearance.

  Further, a normal level and a minimum level are determined in advance as the determination level of the appearance frequency of cherry. In the normal level, if a general player performs a stop operation (so-called a pushing operation) aiming at the “cherry” of the left reel 2L, a value reached by design is determined from the winning probability of the cherry. . In addition, the lowest level is determined to be a value that is reached in design from the winning probability of the cherry and is far from the normal level, even if the player does not perform the pushing operation.

  The cherry winning probability is about 1/121 based on the total number of determination values that can be a cherry winning shown in FIG. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27, 1/1121 or more is defined as the appearance rate that falls within the normal level or more, and 121 games or less are defined as the number of digested games from the previous appearance.

  Further, according to the symbol arrangement of the left reel 2L shown in FIG. 4, the rate at which “cherry” can be pulled in without pressing “cherry” is about １ ／. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27, an appearance rate of less than 1/363 is determined as a range below the lowest level, and 364 or more are determined as the number of digested games from the previous appearance.

  In this way, when comparing the normal level with the lowest level, regarding the appearance rate, the normal level is determined to be 1/121, which is less than this value (in the direction in which the appearance frequency decreases), and the normal level is set as a predetermined value. 1/363 that deviates by 2/363 or more from the value (subtracting 2/363 from the normal level) is defined as the lowest level. Further, regarding the number of digested games since the previous appearance, the normal level is determined to be 121 games, which is larger than this value (in the direction of decreasing appearance frequency) and deviates by 243 games or more as a predetermined value (to the normal level). 364 games (added by 243 games) are set as the lowest level.

  In addition, as the lowest level, even if the player does not perform the pushing operation, the value reached by design from the winning probability of the cherry is illustrated, but not limited to this, it is a value that has a lower appearance frequency than the normal level, Any value that deviates from the normal level by a predetermined degree or more is acceptable. For example, the minimum level deviates from the normal level by a predetermined degree or more so that the player feels that the appearance frequency of cherries is too low and that the internal lottery is mistrusted. What is determined by the value may be used.

  The main control unit 41 performs a process of updating information for specifying the “appearance rate” and “the number of digested games since the previous appearance” according to the number of digested games and the occurrence of a cherry prize. Further, when the main control unit 41 performs the reel effect type lottery with reference to any of the tables of FIGS. 26A to 26C, the updated “appearance rate” and “digestion from the previous appearance” are performed. The level to which each “game number” belongs is specified, and the reel effect type lottery is performed with reference to a table corresponding to the specified level. If the level specified from the “appearance rate” is different from the level specified from the “number of digested games from the previous appearance”, a level with a low appearance frequency (for example, a normal level or higher and a level lower than the minimum level). If is specified, the table corresponding to (below the lowest level) is referred to.

  When it is determined that the cherry appearance frequency is within the normal level or more based on the determination reference value of FIG. 27, the table of FIG. 26A is used. In addition, when it is determined that the cherry appearance frequency is in the range of the minimum level less than the normal level or higher based on the determination reference value in FIG. 27, the table in FIG. 26B is used. In addition, when it is determined that the cherry appearance frequency is in a range less than the lowest level based on the determination reference value in FIG. 27, the table in FIG. 26C is used.

  In FIG. 26 (a), the distribution ratios of the push order effect, the aim effect, the two-stage effect, and the cherry effect are determined to be 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10%, respectively. In b), it is determined to be 35%, 25%, 15%, and 25%, and in FIG. 26C, it is determined to be 0%, 0%, 0%, and 100%.

  In this way, in the reel production type lottery triggered by the weak cherry alone winning, the reel production is selected at a different distribution ratio according to the appearance frequency of the cherry. Specifically, the lower the appearance frequency of cherries, the higher the ratio that the cherry effect is selected as the reel effect. When the cherry appearance frequency is less than the minimum level, the cherry effect is always selected as the reel effect. Is set. Further, the reel effects other than the cherry effect are set so that the push order effect is selected at a higher rate than the other reel effects.

  When the reel effect type lottery table shown in FIG. 26D is referred to, the push order effect is selected. In other words, as the reel effect during the freeze that is triggered by the push order bell winning, the push order effect is executed that gives the impression that the winning eye is not stopped by the pushing order.

  When the reel effect type lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (e) is referred to, a push order effect is selected at a rate of 30%, an aim effect is selected at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 40%. A two-stage effect is selected. As described above, the reel effect during the freeze triggered by the fact that the bonus is being selected is set so that the two-stage effect is selected at a higher rate than the other reel effects. For this reason, the expectation with respect to having won the bonus can be enhanced by executing the two-stage effect.

  As described above, in the freeze lottery of Se5 or Se9 in FIG. 24, when it is determined to execute the freeze and the type of the reel effect is determined, the main control unit 41 performs the freeze and the freeze for executing the reel effect. Execute related processing.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a flowchart of freeze-related processing. Freeze-related processing is performed when a freeze is won in the freeze lottery of Se4 or Se9 in FIG. As a result of the processing after Sf1, a freeze that delays the progress of the game occurs, and this freeze continues until it is determined YES in Sf5 or Sf14, which will be described later, and control for shifting to normal reel rotation is performed. And executed. When a freeze occurs, the timing for enabling an operation for progressing the game (specifically, an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for deriving the game result) is at least a freeze-related process. Delay until finished.

  Also, among the reel effects during the freeze in this embodiment, “red 7-red 7-red 7” (hereinafter, simply “ 777 ”) indicates that the navigation stock has been given. In addition, it is suggested that the same AT lottery is performed when winning the strong cherry or winning the strongest cherry when the cherry effect is executed as the reel effect during the freeze and the double cherry or triple cherry is stopped. The

  In Sf1, the reel rotation control data for rotating the reels 2L to 2R is set as the reel effect during the freeze, and the reel rotation control is performed in the reel effect period counter for specifying the period during which the reel effect is executed during the freeze. A value corresponding to the data is set, and reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed based on the reel rotation control data. The value of the reel effect period counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and updated as time passes. When the reel rotation control data is set, for example, a value corresponding to 15 seconds is set as the value of the reel effect period counter.

  The control based on the reel rotation control data is executed for a predetermined period (15 seconds), during which the reels 2L to 2R are rotated, and the reels 2L to 2R are rotated after the predetermined period (reel 2L to 2R starts rotating). When an elapse of time until the speed reaches a certain speed, the operation is controlled during an operation reception period during which the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R is effectively received as an operation for stopping the reel rotation in the reel production.

  The contents of control based on the reel rotation control data will be described with reference to FIG. As for the reel rotation control data, when the player operates the start switch 7 (winning in the freeze lottery at the time of the operation), as shown in FIG. 30, the reels 2L to 2L until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. The rotational speed of each of 2R is accelerated (gradient portion of the reel in FIG. 30).

  When the rotational speeds of the reels 2L to 2R reach a constant speed, an operation accepting state in which an operation from the player (but not an operation for advancing the game) can be received effectively is entered.

  Further, when a predetermined operation (operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R) is not detected during the operation reception period, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), the control is shifted to normal reel control as predetermined control data. Control data is set and control based on the control data is started.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined operation (operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R) is detected during the operation reception period, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the reel rotation control data is displayed when the predetermined operation is detected. The corresponding control is terminated, and control based on result control data described later is started. That is, when a predetermined operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the reel rotation control data is truncated and shortened at that timing, and the control based on the next control data is newly set and started.

  When the reel rotation control data is set, a process for transmitting a rotation start command during freezing to the sub-control unit 91 is performed in Sf2. The freeze rotation start command is a command for specifying the type of reel effect, the start of reel rotation control, and the timing controlled during the operation reception period.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives the rotation start command during freeze, when the predetermined period (the time from the start of the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R until the reels 2L to 2R reach a constant speed) has elapsed, the stop switch 8L to After performing the effect that 8R has been activated, an effect corresponding to the type of reel effect is performed.

  In the case of the push order effect, for example, a message such as “???” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and if the correct answer is made in the push order, the effect is as if a bell winning is generated. Also, if it is an eye-opening effect, for example, a message such as “Aim for Red 7!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and if the eye-opening is successful, an effect as if a bonus prize is generated is performed. Further, in the case of the cherry effect, for example, a message such as “Aim at cherry!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect of winning the cherry is performed. These effects at the time of execution of the push order effect, the eye-push effect, and the cherry effect are executed with a predetermined probability at the time of the push order bell or at the time of winning the cherry in the normal time that is not frozen. For this reason, even if the push order effect, the eye-push effect, and the cherry effect are executed during the freeze, it cannot be distinguished from the reel control in the normal time. In the two-stage production, no production is performed. For this reason, even if the two-stage effect is executed during the freeze, it cannot be distinguished from the reel control in the normal time. Therefore, even in the case of the reel effect during the freeze, the player can be operated to the stop switches 8L to 8R in the same manner as the reel control in the normal time.

  In Sf3, it is determined whether or not the control content based on the control data is an operation acceptance period. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed of each of the reels 2L to 2R has reached a constant speed and the operation acceptance period is reached. When it is determined that it is not the operation reception period, the process of Sf3 is repeated, and when it is determined that it is the operation reception period, the process proceeds to Sf4 and it is determined whether or not an operation corresponding to the control data is received. .

  Here, when the control data is the reel rotation control data shown in FIG. 30, the operation corresponding to the control data is one of the stop switches 8L to 8R. When the control data is the result control data shown in FIG. 31, the corresponding operation is the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 and the operation of the start switch 7 after the operation of the MAXBET switch 6.

  If it is determined in Sf4 that the corresponding operation has not been accepted, it is determined in Sf5 whether or not the operation reception period has ended and the value of the reel effect period counter has reached zero. If it is not determined in Sf5 that the operation reception period has ended and the value of the reel effect period counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to Sf4. If it is determined in Sf5 that the operation reception period has ended and the value of the reel effect period counter has reached 0, the freeze-related processing ends. As a result, control for shifting to normal reel rotation control is performed.

  If it is determined in Sf4 that an operation corresponding to the control data being executed is accepted, the process proceeds to Sf6. As previously mentioned. The operation corresponding to the case where the control data being executed is the reel rotation control data shown in FIG. 30 is “any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R”, and the control data being executed is shown in FIG. The operation corresponding to the result control data shown in FIG. 5 is “BET switch 6 operation → start switch 7 operation”.

  In Sf6, it is determined whether the control being executed is reel rotation control. When the control being executed is the reel rotation control, the process proceeds to Sf7. Further, when the reel rotation control is not performed (in the case of result control data described later), since the winning item is derived in the reel production, the process proceeds to Sf1 and the reel rotation control is started again. Processing is performed.

  In Sf7, a result lottery for lottering a control pattern for deriving the result of the current reel rotation is executed. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the result lottery table used in Sf7. In the result lottery in the present embodiment, a result lottery table is provided according to the type of freeze.

  When the type of reel effect being executed is any one of the push order effect, the eye push effect, and the two-stage effect, the result lottery table of FIG. 29A is used, and the case is the cherry effect. The result lottery table of FIG. 29B is used.

  When the result lottery table in FIG. 29A is referred to, as a control pattern for deriving the result, “777” stop pattern for stopping “red 7-red 7-red 7” on the winning line LN; Instead of “red 7-red 7-red 7”, a misalignment stop pattern for stopping the misalignment on the winning line LN is provided.

  If the current result lottery is the first result lottery during the current freeze, 90% is determined to be the “777” stop pattern, and 10% is determined to be the outlier stop pattern. Further, in the case of the result lottery for the second and subsequent times during the current freeze, the “777” stop pattern is determined at 50%, and the shift stop pattern is determined at 50%. As described above, as a result of the first reel effect during the freeze, it is possible to stop the winning selection at a higher rate than the second and subsequent times.

  Next, when the result lottery table of FIG. 29B is referred to, “Cherry-Cherry-any” is terminated without stopping on the winning line LN as a control pattern for deriving the result “two consecutive. "Cherry failure pattern", "Cherry-cherry-any" is stopped on the winning line LN, "double-cherry success + no-triple-cherry promotion pattern" is finished, and "cherry-cherry-" "any" is stopped on the winning line LN and the double cherries are derived, and then the reel rotation is started again, but "Cherry-Cherry-Cherry" is finished without stopping on the winning line LN. “+3 consecutive cherry promotion failure pattern” and “cherry-cherry-any” are stopped on the winning line LN and the two consecutive cherries are derived. After, then started again reel rotation is provided with a "cherry - Cherry - Cherry" stops on the winning line LN of it ends "twin cherry successful +3 series Cherry promoted successful pattern".

  In addition, the result lottery table shown in FIG. 29 (b) has different distribution ratios depending on whether or not the “cherry” of the left reel 2L has stopped at the lower stage (single cherry stop, cherry 2 winning) before the freeze occurred. The control pattern is determined by. The main control unit 41 performs processing for holding single cherry information for specifying whether or not a single cherry is stopped in the weak cherry winning game until the next game. Based on the single cherry information, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the “cherry” of the left reel 2L has stopped at the lower stage before the occurrence of the freeze.

  If a single cherry is stopped, it is determined as “2 consecutive cherry success + 3 consecutive cherry promotion no pattern” with a probability of 25%, and “2 consecutive cherry success + 3 consecutive cherry promotion failure pattern” with a 35% probability. Then, it is determined as “2 consecutive cherry success + 3 consecutive cherry promotion success pattern” with a probability of 40%.

  In addition, when the single cherry is not stopped, it is determined as a “double cherry failure pattern” with a probability of 20%, and a “double cherry success pattern without a triple cherry promotion” with a probability of 50%, With a probability of 30%, it is determined to be “double cherry success + triple cherry promotion failure pattern”.

  In the case of the cherry effect, the control pattern for deriving the result is determined with the probability shown in FIG. 29 (b), and when the triple cherry is displayed, the same AT lottery as the strongest cherry winning is performed, By displaying the cherry, it can be suggested that the same AT lottery as the strong cherry winning is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 28, in Sf8, the control based on the set reel rotation control data is terminated, result control data corresponding to the control pattern determined by the result lottery is set, and the result is displayed in the reel effect period counter. A new value corresponding to the control data is set.

  In Sf9, whether or not the reel effect being executed was a cherry effect and the single cherry was stopped in the game before the freeze occurred, that is, whether or not “cherry” of the left reel 2L stopped at the lower stage and won the cherry 2 Is determined.

  If it is determined that the reel effect being executed is the cherry effect and the “cherry” of the left reel 2L has stopped at the lower stage before the occurrence of the freeze, the process proceeds to Sf11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel effect being executed is the cherry effect and the “cherry” of the left reel 2L has not stopped in the lower stage before the occurrence of the freeze, the process proceeds to Sf10.

  Since the case of shifting to Sf10 is a case where the single cherry has not been stopped before the occurrence of the freeze, the single cherry is temporarily removed before performing control based on the result control data corresponding to the control pattern determined in Sf7. In order to stop, pre-result control data for stopping and re-rotating the single cherry is added. That is, after the single cherry is stopped and re-rotated, the result control data for performing control corresponding to the control pattern determined in Sf7 is updated, and the reel effect period counter is also updated.

  In Sf11, reel control based on the set result control data is executed. The control based on the set reel rotation control data is terminated, and the reel effect control by the reels 2L to 2R is executed based on the set result control data. That is, when an operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R is accepted during the operation acceptance period during the reel production based on the reel rotation control data, the control based on the set reel rotation control data is terminated, and the result lottery is set. The result control data corresponding to the control pattern is set, the value corresponding to the control data is reset in the reel effect period counter, and control based on the set control data is executed.

  In the case where the push order effect, the eye effect, and the two-stage effect are being executed and the result control data corresponding to the “777” stop pattern is set, the value of the reel effect period counter is, for example, 10 When a value corresponding to seconds is set and the result control data corresponding to the off-start stop pattern is set, for example, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as the value of the reel effect period counter.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining an example of the control content based on the result control data corresponding to the “777” stop pattern. The control based on the result control data corresponding to the “777” stop pattern is executed for a predetermined period (10 seconds). First, a mode different from the reel control in the normal time (for example, any one of the stop switches 8L to 8C is selected). Control to stop “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” when the reel rotation stops and the number of frames to be drawn is not limited. Then, the control is performed again to stop “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”, and when the predetermined timing is reached (for example, 2 seconds have elapsed), the MAXBET switch 6 and the start switch 7 are operated. It is controlled until a predetermined period elapses in the operation reception period to be received. When “red 7-red 7-red 7” is stopped during the freeze, the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery and performs a process of giving navigation stock as will be described later.

  When a predetermined operation (start switch 7 operation after the MAXBET switch 6 operation) is not detected during the operation reception period, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), control for shifting to normal reel control as predetermined control data Data is set and control based on the control data is started.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined operation (start switch 7 operation after the MAXBET switch 6 operation) is detected during the operation reception period, the control corresponding to the result control data is terminated when the predetermined operation is detected, and again Control based on the reel rotation control data is started. That is, when a predetermined operation is accepted during the operation acceptance period, the control based on the result control data is truncated and shortened at that timing, and the control based on the next control data is newly set and started.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining an example of the control content based on the result control data corresponding to the missed eye stop pattern. The control based on the result control data corresponding to the slip-out stop pattern is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds). After performing control for stopping the slip-off in a mode different from the reel control in the normal time, When the timing is reached (for example, 2 seconds have elapsed), control data to be transferred to normal reel control is set as predetermined control data, and control based on the control data is started.

  Further, when the cherry effect is being executed and the result control data corresponding to the double cherry failure pattern, the double cherry success + the triple cherry non-promotion pattern is set, For example, when a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set, and result control data corresponding to a double cherry success + triple cherry promotion failure pattern, a double cherry success + triple cherry promotion success pattern is set, the value of the reel effect period counter For example, a value corresponding to 8 seconds is set. Further, when the pre-result control data is included, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds is set.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an example of the control content based on the result control data corresponding to the cherry effect. The control based on the result control data corresponding to the double cherry failure pattern is executed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) as shown in FIG. 33 (a), and is shifted in a manner different from the reel control in the normal time. After the control to stop the operation, the control data to be transferred to the normal reel control is set as the predetermined control data when the predetermined timing is reached (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed), and the control based on the control data is started. .

  The control based on the result control data corresponding to the pattern of success of two consecutive cherries + no pattern of three consecutive cherries is executed over a predetermined period (3 seconds) as shown in FIG. After performing the control to stop the double cherries in the mode, the control based on the predetermined control data for shifting to the normal reel control is started when the predetermined timing is reached (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed). When the double cherries are stopped during the freeze, the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery in the same manner as in the strong cherry winning as will be described later.

  The control based on the result control data corresponding to the double cherry success + triple cherry promotion failure pattern is executed for a predetermined period (8 seconds) as shown in FIG. 33 (b). After the control to stop the double cherries in a different mode, it is re-rotated when a predetermined timing is reached (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed), and the misalignment is stopped in a mode different from the reel control in the normal state. After the control is performed, control based on predetermined control data for shifting to normal reel control is started when a predetermined period has elapsed.

  The control based on the result control data corresponding to the double cherry success + triple cherry promotion success pattern is executed over a predetermined period (8 seconds) as shown in FIG. 33 (b). Is a control that stops the double cherries in a different manner from the reel control in the normal state by performing a control to stop the double cherries in a different mode and then re-rotating when a predetermined timing is reached (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed) After performing the above, control based on predetermined control data for shifting to normal reel control is started when a predetermined period has elapsed. When the double cherries and triple cherries are stopped during the freeze, the sub-control unit 91 performs the same AT lottery as when the strong cherry is won, as will be described later, and performs the same AT lottery as when the strongest cherry is won. Do.

  Further, when the pre-result control data is included in the set result control data, as shown in FIG. 33C, it is executed for a predetermined period (3 seconds), which is different from the reel control in the normal time. After performing the control to stop the single cherry in the mode, when the predetermined timing is reached (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed), the control is shifted to the control based on the result control data won in the result lottery of Sf7. As described above, when the pre-result control data is included, the control based on the pre-result control data is performed prior to the control based on the result control data. Even when the cherry is not stopped, after performing the preparation control to stop the single cherry, the promotion effect to the double cherry or triple cherry can be performed.

  In Sf12, a process for transmitting the frozen result command to the sub-control unit 91 is performed. The result command during freezing is a command for specifying that the result control has been started and the content of the result (whether “777” is stopped, whether two cherries are stopped, whether three cherries are stopped, etc.). When receiving the result command during freeze, the sub-control unit 91 performs a predetermined AT lottery and a predetermined effect as will be described later.

  In Sf13, it is determined whether or not the control based on the slippage stop pattern is being executed during the cherry effect or the reel effect other than the cherry effect. If it is determined that the pattern is in the middle of the cellar effect or the outlier stop pattern, the process proceeds to Sf14. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the cherry production nor the outlier stop pattern is present, that is, when the control by the “777” stop pattern is being executed, it is based on the result control data that can be controlled during the operation reception period. Since control is being performed, the process proceeds to Sf3, and the processes after Sf3 are executed again.

  In addition, it is a case where it transfers to Sf3 after setting result control data, Comprising: It determines with YES in Sf4 by operating the start switch 7 after operating the MAXBET switch 6 during the operation reception period. In Sf6 after YES is determined in Sf4, since the control being executed is not based on the reel rotation control but based on the result control data corresponding to the “777” stop pattern, it is determined NO in Sf6 and Sf1 Then, the process after Sf1 is executed again. For this reason, when the “777” stop pattern is determined in the result lottery and a predetermined operation is performed, the reel rotation control is performed again, and the predetermined operation is performed, so that the result lottery (second and subsequent times) is performed. ) Will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of shifting to Sf14, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel effect period counter has reached zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the control based on the result control data is finished. Sf14 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the control based on the result control data has ended, and when it is determined that the control has ended, the freeze-related processing ends. As a result, processing for shifting to normal reel control is executed.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. Based on the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command received in the stage, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table Output control of various production devices is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed and sets the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the betting number setting operation is performed during the execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set, Is to be canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub-control unit 91 receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, it receives an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received before, the effect being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the left reel 2L is first stopped based on the reel stop command received during non-AT and when the navigation effect is not executed, and the determination result is In response, control is performed to give a predetermined penalty. The predetermined penalty is, for example, restricting the AT from being controlled over a predetermined period (2000 games), changing an AT winning probability in an AT lottery described later to a low probability, or not performing an AT lottery. This refers to performing control that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Note that there may be a case where the left reel 2L cannot be stopped for the first time due to a simple operation error. In such a case, a penalty is also imposed on a bona fide player. In order to solve this, when a predetermined penalty condition that can be inferred that the player has intentionally stopped the reels other than the left reel 2L in the first stop intentionally is satisfied, a penalty control is performed. It may be.

  The predetermined penalty condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of times that the reels other than the left reel 2L are first stopped until the predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) is reached reaches a predetermined number (5 times). Also, based on the internal winning command, the winning determination command, and the gaming state command received during the non-AT, the winning combination that does not win is won as long as the left reel 2L is first stopped according to the gaming state. Or when the number of times determined in this way reaches the predetermined number of times (5 times) before the predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) is consumed. Note that the winning combination that does not win as long as the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time according to the gaming state corresponds to, for example, the winning of Lip 4 at the time of winning 6-option Lip 3-6 during RT3.

  Next, processing related to AT among processing performed on the sub-control unit 91 side will be described. The sub-control unit 91 controls the effect state to AT according to the gaming state, and performs AT-related processing for executing the navigation effect.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing AT-related processing. The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and AT lottery is executed when the predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied. The AT lottery includes a navigation grant lottery that determines whether or not the number of navigation stocks is given, and a navigation stock lottery that decides the number of navigation stocks to be given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks, the game is controlled by the AT until the game is consumed for a predetermined period (for example, 50 games after being controlled by RT2), during which the navigation effect can be executed. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining AT lottery related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91. In the AT lottery-related processing, an AT lottery for lottering whether or not the number of navigation stocks is given and how many Navistock numbers are given in accordance with the establishment of the AT lottery conditions, and the established AT lottery Processing for setting an effect corresponding to the condition is performed. The AT lottery related process is executed at a timing related to the game start.

  In Ss1, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery condition is satisfied. As the AT lottery conditions in this embodiment, the first condition established by winning a weak cherry alone not at the same time as a bonus, or the strong cherry winning alone and not at the same time as a bonus, or stopping double cherries during cherry production The second condition established by the above and the third condition established by the strong watermelon win alone, the triple cherry stop during cherry production, or the strongest cherry win not at the same time as the bonus, and the bonus from the previous bonus end or AT end The fourth condition that is established when the number of games that have been digested without winning or starting AT reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) (hereinafter also referred to as reaching the ceiling), during the push order effect, during the push effect Or the fifth condition established by stopping the winning eye (“Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”) during the two-stage production. There. The success or failure of the first to third conditions and the fifth condition is specified from the internal winning command transmitted from the main control unit 41 or the result command during freezing. The success or failure of the fourth condition is specified from the value of the bonus / AT game number counter updated in the sub-control unit 91.

  The first to third conditions will be described with respect to an example in which a predetermined lottery winning combination is also established by winning, but a predetermined winning combination included in the lottery target winning portion (if the first and second conditions are cherry, It may be established by winning a watermelon if there are three conditions. The fourth condition only needs to be satisfied at the timing after the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games, and may be satisfied when it reaches the number of digested games. It may be established after Further, the AT lottery conditions are not limited to the first to fifth conditions described above, and may include conditions established by winning a bonus or winning a prize, for example.

  When it is determined that any AT lottery condition is satisfied in Ss1, it is determined whether the gaming state currently controlled in Ss2 is neither RT4 (including a bonus winning game) nor bonus. The currently controlled gaming state is specified from the gaming state command and the internal winning command transmitted from the main control unit 41. If it is determined in Ss2 that either RT4 or bonus is in effect, the AT lottery related process is terminated without performing the AT lottery described later. As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not performed during the period from when the bonus is won until the bonus ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Ss2 that neither RT4 nor bonus is in effect, AT lottery is performed in Ss3.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining an AT lottery table used for AT lottery. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the navigation stock is given according to the lottery probability determined corresponding to the established AT lottery condition. In the AT lottery table, a distribution ratio to which navigation stock is assigned for each predetermined AT lottery condition is set corresponding to the number of navigation stocks (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10). Has been.

  More specifically, when the weak cherry is won and the first condition is satisfied, the probability that the navigation stock to be given is zero is set to 70%, and the probability that the navigation stock is given is set to 30%.

  If the second cherry is stopped during a strong cherry win or cherry production and the second condition is met, the probability that the assigned Navistock will be 0 will be 15%, the probability that it will be 35, and the probability that it will be 2 Is 35%, the probability of 3 is 10%, and the probability of 5 is 5%.

  If the third condition is met when the strongest cherry wins, triple cherry stops during cherry production, or strong watermelon wins and the third condition is met, the probability that the assigned Navistock will be 0 will be 5%, the probability that it will be 10%, The probability of 2 is set to 10%, the probability of 3 to 35%, and the probability of 5 to 40%. In addition, when 2 consecutive cherry stops and 3 consecutive cherry stops are specified in the cherry effect from the freeze result command, it is assumed that both the second condition and the third condition are satisfied, and AT lottery based on the second condition is satisfied, An AT lottery is performed when the third condition is satisfied.

  When the ceiling is reached and the fourth condition is satisfied, ten navigation stocks are determined with a probability of 100%. When the winning condition (“Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”) is stopped and the fifth condition is satisfied during the push order production, the eye-push production, or the two-stage production, one navigation stock is given. Is set to 30%, 2 is set to 30%, 3 is set to 20%, and 5 is set to 20%.

  Thus, the probability that navigation stock is given when the AT lottery condition is satisfied is 100% when the fourth condition or the fifth condition is satisfied, and then the order of the third condition and the second condition is followed. And is set to be lowest when the first condition is satisfied. Further, the expected number of navigation stocks to be given (for example, probability × sum of the number) is set so that the fourth condition is the largest, and then the third condition, the fifth condition, and the second condition are in order. It is set to be the smallest when the first condition is satisfied. When the first condition is satisfied, that is, when the weak cherry is won, there is a possibility that freezing is performed as shown in FIG. 25 in the next game. In this case, the second condition, the third condition, Alternatively, it can be expected that the fifth condition is satisfied.

  Although not shown in the drawings, as described above, the AT lottery condition is satisfied even when winning the lip 6 in RT2, and in this case, the AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock is always given. It should be noted that, in RT2, the AT lottery condition may be established by winning the lip 6 without winning the lip 6, and the navigation stock may be always given.

  Returning to FIG. 34, in Ss4, an effect corresponding to the established AT lottery condition is set, and the AT lottery related process is terminated. Thereby, the set effect is executed in the game started this time. As an effect corresponding to the AT lottery condition, for example, an effect of displaying an image of “Aim for cherry!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is determined in response to a cherry win. This allows the player to push the “Cherry” symbol, and from the number of “Cherry” symbols that were stopped, it was determined whether the winning cherry was weak, strong, or strongest As a result, it is possible to change the expectation that the navigation stock is awarded and the navigation stock is given. In addition, the possibility that a single cherry is stopped in a weak cherry winning game can be improved. When a cherry effect is executed in the next game, as shown in FIG. The possibility of being promoted to a continuous cherry increases, and as a result, a sense of expectation that the second condition or the third condition is satisfied and the AT lottery is executed and the navigation stock is given can be given.

  In addition, when a double cherry stop or a triple cherry stop is specified from the frozen result command, “Yeah! Two consecutive cherry!” Is matched with the timing when the double cherry is stopped from the timing of receiving the frozen result command. An effect of displaying a message such as “Cherry!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and a message “Yeah! Triple cherry!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the timing when the triple cherry is stopped. The effect to be displayed is executed.

  In addition, a predetermined continuous effect (hereinafter also referred to as a strong watermelon continuous effect) is determined in response to the strong watermelon winning. For example, as a continuous production for strong watermelons, the teammates and enemy characters perform battles over 3 games, telling whether or not they have acquired Navistock, and reporting the results of the battles in the 3rd game. To do. When the navigation stock is given, the teammate character wins. When the navigation stock is not given, the teammate character loses. As a result, when the continuous production for strong watermelon is executed, an image of “cherry” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in response to the provision of navigation stock and a larger number of navigation stocks. It is possible to make the player have a greater expectation from the AT winning probability than when the player wins.

  In addition, when the winning selection stop is specified from the frozen result command, the message “Yeah! Acquired Navistock!” In accordance with the timing when the winning selection is stopped from the timing of receiving the frozen result command. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The sub-control unit 91 wins one of the bonuses (including the bonus winning game), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a lottery target role that can be won at the same time as the bonus (a lip shown in FIG. 21). When a strong single sheet, weak watermelon, etc.) are selected alone, a predetermined continuous effect (hereinafter also referred to as a bonus continuous effect) is executed in the same manner as when strong watermelon is selected. As a bonus continuous effect, for example, an effect that an ally character and an enemy character battle for five games is performed, whether the bonus is won or not, and the result of the battle is notified in the fifth game. . When the bonus is won, the teammate wins. When the bonus is not won, the teammate character loses.

  As an effect corresponding to the arrival at the ceiling, an effect of displaying a message such as “arriving at the ceiling! Acquiring Navistock 10!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is performed.

  Here, the reel effect during freezing and the effect executed on the sub-control unit 91 side will be described.

  First, a push order effect, a mainstream effect, and a two-stage effect will be described. When it is determined on the main control unit 41 side that the occurrence of a freeze is caused when the start switch 7 is operated, and it is determined to execute any one of the push order effect, the target effect, and the two-stage effect, the reels in Sf1 of FIG. The rotation control data and the reel effect period counter (see FIG. 30A) are set and the corresponding reel effect is started, and a rotation start command during freezing is transmitted. By starting the reel effect, the reel rotation control is started in the same manner as in the normal state.

  On the sub-control unit 91 side, an effect corresponding to the reel effect specified based on the rotation start command during freeze is executed. When the push order effect is specified, a message such as “???” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and if the correct answer is given in the push order, the effect is as if a bell prize is generated. When it is specified that the effect is a push-up effect, a message such as “Aim for Red 7!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and if the push is successful, the effect is as if a bonus prize is generated. It should be noted that these effects are executed with a predetermined probability at the time of pushing bell or cherry winning even during normal times when the image is not frozen. Further, when it is specified that the two-stage effect is specified, no special effect is performed. For this reason, even if the reel effect during the freeze is executed, the reel control in the normal time and the player cannot be distinguished.

  If any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated during the operation acceptance period (YES in Sf4 in FIG. 28), a result lottery is performed and result control data and a reel effect period counter (see FIG. 31 (a) or FIG. 32) is set, the control based on the reel rotation control data is discarded (see FIG. 30 (b)), and control based on the newly set result control data is started, The result command during freezing is sent. As a result, when the “777” stop pattern is determined according to the lottery result, “red 7-red 7-red 7” is controlled in a different manner from the normal mode (when the two-stage effect is executed, it is out of place). After the eyes are stopped, the control is performed again by rotating the eyes again to stop “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”.

  On the sub-control unit 91 side, an effect corresponding to the result specified based on the frozen result command is executed. When the “777” stop pattern is specified, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a message such as “Yeah! Acquired Navistock!” At the timing when the winning eye is stopped as described above. Run. At this time, the number of navigation stocks actually acquired by the AT lottery may be notified.

  Furthermore, after the winning selection is stopped, the operation acceptance period is started again (NO in Sf13 in FIG. 28), and after the MAXBET switch 6 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the start switch 7 is further operated. If it is determined (YES in Sf4 in FIG. 28), it is determined NO in Sf6, and the reel rotation control data and the reel effect period counter (see FIG. 30 (a)) are set again in Sf1 in FIG. The production is started and a rotation start command during freezing is transmitted. As described above, as long as the “777” stop pattern is determined for the push order effect, the eye effect, and the two-stage effect, the reel effect for stopping the output from the reel rotation is repeatedly performed.

  On the sub-control unit 91 side, when it is determined that the operation acceptance period has been reached based on the time elapsed after receiving the freeze result command, a message such as “BET and start operation!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect displayed on 51 is executed.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 executes an effect corresponding to the reel effect specified based on the second and subsequent freeze rotation start commands. When the push order effect is specified, a message such as “Navi GET with correct push order!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect of notifying that the navigation stock is acquired if the correct push order is obtained. To do. When it is specified that it is a directing effect, a message such as “Aim for Red 7 and get more navigation!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and notification that the navigation stock is acquired if the pressing is successful. Perform the production. When it is specified that it is a two-stage effect, an effect of causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a message such as “I expect red 7 GET again!” Is performed.

  On the other hand, when the slippage stop pattern is determined according to the lottery result, the main control unit 41 performs control to stop the slippage in a mode different from normal (see FIG. 32). Transition to reel control. On the side of the sub-control unit 91, when it is determined that the stop pattern is based on the freeze result command, a message such as “Sorry!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the timing at which the start of stoppage is stopped. The effect to be executed is executed.

  Next, cherry production will be described. If the occurrence of freeze is determined when the start switch 7 is operated on the main control unit 41 side and it is determined to execute the cherry effect, the reel rotation control data and the reel effect period counter (see FIG. 30A) in Sf1 of FIG. Reference) is set to start the corresponding reel effect, and a rotation start command during freezing is transmitted. By starting the reel effect, the reel rotation control is started in the same manner as in the normal state.

  On the sub-control unit 91 side, when it is specified that the cherry effect is based on the rotation start command during freeze, the liquid crystal display 51 performs an effect of displaying a message “Aim at cherry!”. Note that this effect is also executed during normal times that are not frozen, when a cherry is won, and the like. For this reason, even if the reel effect during the freeze is executed, the reel control in the normal time and the player cannot be distinguished.

  If any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated during the operation acceptance period (YES in Sf4 in FIG. 28), a result lottery is performed and result control data and a reel effect period counter (see FIG. 33) is set, the control based on the reel rotation control data is discarded (see FIG. 30B), the control based on the newly set result control data is started, and the result command during freezing is transmitted. Is done. As a result, control is performed to stop the outcome corresponding to the lottery result in a mode different from the normal (for example, no limit on the number of drawn frames).

  On the sub-control unit 91 side, an effect corresponding to the result specified based on the frozen result command is executed. When it is specified that the double cherries are to be stopped, an effect of causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a message such as “Yeah! Double cherries!” Is executed at the timing when the double cherries are stopped. In addition, when it is specified that the triple cherry is to be stopped, an effect of causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a message such as “Yeah! Triple cherry!” According to the timing at which the triple cherry is stopped is executed. . At this time, when the winning lot is made by AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks actually acquired may be notified. On the other hand, when it is determined that the double cherries or triple cherries are not stopped and the missed eyes are to be stopped, a message such as “Sorry!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the timing at which the missed eyes are stopped. The effect to be displayed is executed.

  As an effect corresponding to the reel effect, the example in which the corresponding image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the effect effect LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the effect performed by controlling reel LED55 may be sufficient.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 has acquired or may have acquired the navigation stock by executing the predetermined effect corresponding to the reel effect executed during the freeze by the main control unit 41. It is possible to inform the player about whether or not it is easy to understand.

  Next, control to the AT will be described. When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the AT lottery, the sub control unit 91 stores the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies whether to control to AT based on the presence / absence of the number of navigation stocks in the RAM 91c. When the number of navigation stocks remains, and when the number of navigation stocks is further acquired by AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the remaining number of navigation stocks. In this embodiment, the AT is controlled in accordance with the total number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery.

  When the navigation stock is acquired during the non-AT, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when a predetermined AT start condition is satisfied. The predetermined AT start condition is satisfied when a specific winning situation is reached. As an example of a specific winning situation, for example, when it is non-AT and during RT3, it is established when one of the 6-option lip 3-6 is won, during non-AT and during RT1 In some cases, it is established when one of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, the right bell 1 to 4, and the 3 alternative lip 1 to 6 is won.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating that it is AT in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c and stores it in the AT when the AT start condition is satisfied when the non-AT and one or more navigation stocks are given. Control.

  Note that the AT start condition is not limited to what is established according to the winning situation, but after performing a predetermined continuous effect over a plurality of games triggered by the acquisition of navigation stock, It may be established when it is notified that it has been acquired. In this case, the continuous performance is executed according to a predetermined probability even when the navigation stock is not acquired. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that the navigation stock has been acquired by executing the continuous performance.

  The sub-control unit 91 starts the control to the AT after notifying the AT that the control is performed by the AT on condition that the AT flag is specified from the AT flag in RT1 to RT3. To do. Thereby, the navigation effect is executed. For this reason, in RT3, there is a higher possibility of winning a Lip 4 (promotional lip) when one of the 6-option lips 3 to 6 is won, and as a result, control to RT1 is facilitated. Further, in RT1, when the winning combination is left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, right bell 1-4, or 3 alternative lip 1-6, the transition stop or lip 3 (falling lip) As a result, it becomes easier to maintain the control to RT1, and as a result, there is a higher possibility of winning a Lip 6 (special lip) when winning 3 choice lips 4-6, and as a result, RT2 It becomes easy to be controlled.

  In RT3 or RT1, in principle, navigation effects can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 displays a message image such as “AT in progress” on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, when shifting from RT3 during AT to RT1, a message image such as “a little more until RT2” is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. Note that the control to the AT is continued even when the RT3 is controlled to the RT1 by the Lip 4 (promotion lip) winning in the RT3 during the AT.

  When you win 3 choice lips 4-6 in RT1 during AT, you will consume (subtract) the number of Navistock after the winning game, regardless of whether you won lip 5 (special lip) in the winning game. The AT start effect is executed and the AT can be controlled while the 50 games are consumed. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of navigation stock stored in the RAM 91c. In addition, as a result of winning the 3rd choice lip 4-6 and winning the lip 5 (special lip) at RT1 during AT, when AT3 is shifted to RT3, the AT start effect is performed and the background image on the liquid crystal display 51 also changes. To do. Note that when the 3 selection lips 4 to 6 are already won in RT1, but the AT start effect is being executed without winning the lip 5, the AT start effect may not be newly performed.

  On the other hand, even if a lip 4 (promotional lip) is won at RT1 during non-AT, if any of 6-option lip 3-6 is won at RT1 during non-AT, other than left reel 2L Since this is the case where the reels are first stopped, there is a penalty that the AT is not controlled. For this reason, even if it is controlled by RT1, it is difficult to maintain RT1 because it is not controlled by AT and the navigation effect is not executed, and it is shifted to RT3 due to the stop of the transition or the Lip 3 (falling lip) winning. It will be.

  Further, when a Lip 5 (special Lip) win is made at RT1, a freeze command is transmitted from the main control unit 41 as described above. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a freeze command related to the control to RT2, and when controlling to ART, the sub-control unit 91 remains in a freeze state from the time when the freeze command is received until the next game is started. Control.

  When the number of remaining AT games reaches 0 and the remaining number of navigation stock is 0, the sub-control unit 91 displays a message such as “AT finished!” On the liquid crystal display 51 and indicates that it is not AT. The AT flag is updated to end the series of ATs. As a result, the navigation effect is not executed, so that when the player wins any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, the transition outcome is easily stopped. As a result, RT3 The possibility of being controlled is increased.

  On the other hand, when the number of remaining AT games reaches 0 and the remaining navigation stock number is 1 or more, the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuation effect to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the navigation stock number. Update and continue control to AT. The AT continuation effect is executed, for example, by displaying a message such as “still more!” On the liquid crystal display 51.

  When being controlled by the AT, the sub control unit 91 executes a navigation effect corresponding to a case where a navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is won based on a command from the main control unit 41.

  Here, the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state will be described. First, as the navigation target combination corresponding to RT3, left bell 1-4 including AT, middle bell 1-4, right bell 1-4, and 6-option lip 1-6 are determined.

  Further, as the navigation target combination corresponding to RT1, left bell 1-4 including AT, middle bell 1-4, right bell 1-4, and three-choice lip 1-6 are determined.

  Further, as the navigation target combination corresponding to RT2, left bell 1-4 including AT, middle bell 1-4, right bell 1-4, 7-equipped lip, and 7 listening lip are determined.

  Furthermore, weak cherries, strong cherries, strongest cherries, weak watermelons, and strong watermelons are defined as common navigation target roles in RT1 to RT3.

  As a navigation effect when winning one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, the bell 2 is surely won according to the winning situation, and the transitional exit stop is avoided. The order of pressing is notified. For example, a message such as “It's left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the left bell 1. Further, as a navigation effect when the middle bell 2 is won, a message such as “medium!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when winning one of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6, a push order for reliably winning the promotion lip according to the winning situation is notified. For example, as a navigation effect when the 6-option Lip 3 is won, a message such as “First is middle! Next is right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the 6-option Lip 5 is won, a message such as “First right! Then next middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when winning one of the three-choice lips 1 to 6, a push order for surely winning a promotion lip according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “It's left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the 3rd choice Lip 1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the 3rd choice Lip 3, a message such as “It's right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when one of the weak cherries, the strong cherries and the strongest cherries is won, for example, a message “Aim at the cherries!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the cherries are won. The

  As a navigation effect when winning a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon, for example, a message such as “Aim at the watermelon!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the watermelon is won.

  When the 7-piece lip is won, a navigation effect for informing the push order for reliably winning the lip 6 is executed. For example, a message “Aim at White 7” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with a message “It's right!”.

  When winning a 7-listening lip, a navigation effect that informs the pressing order for reliably winning the lip 7 is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, “right A message such as “Aim for white 7” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with a message such as “!

  The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to the mode described above, and any mode may be used as long as the player can be distinguished according to the winning situation. The navigation effect is not limited to the one displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 executes a game state effect related to the current game state or effect state using electrical components such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39, processing related to the setting of the flag just before the ceiling will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart for explaining the main-side ceiling-related first process executed by the main control unit 41. The main ceiling-related first process is executed at a timing related to the start of the game. More specifically, the main ceiling-related first process is included in the internal lottery process in the game process, and after the internal lottery is completed, until the freeze effect lottery process described above is executed. Executed.

  In Se10, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned 6-option lips 1 to 6 is won. If it is determined in Se10 that none of the 6-option lips 1 to 6 has been won, the first process on the main side ceiling is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that one of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6 is won in Se10, according to the type of the 6-choice lip 1 to 6 that is won in Se11, the Lip 4 winning is not achieved. In addition, one operation procedure is determined from among the operation procedures excluding the operation procedure in which the left reel 2L is first stopped. When the 6-option lip 3 is won, the operation procedure is not the middle-to-left-to-right operation in which the lip 4 is won, and the operation procedure other than the operation procedure to make the left reel 2L the first stop, that is, the middle-to-right One operation procedure is determined from the left operation procedure, right → left → middle operation procedure, and right → middle → left operation procedure. The determined operation procedure is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507 until the game ends.

  In Se12, the operation procedure information that can identify the one operation procedure determined in Se11 is output to the sub-control unit 91, and the main-side ceiling-related first process is terminated. The operation procedure information may be output including the information so as to be specified from the internal winning command, or may be output so as to be specified from a dedicated command.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining a sub-side ceiling-related first process executed by the sub-control unit 91. The sub-ceiling-related first process is executed at a timing related to the start of the game.

  In Ss11, it is determined whether or not the current game is a bonus winning game. When it is determined in Ss11 that the game is not a bonus winning game, it is determined in Ss12 whether or not the current game is an AT entry game. The AT entry game is a game in which control to the AT is started in RT3 or the like.

  When YES is determined in Ss11 or Ss12, in Ss19, the value of the bonus / AT game number counter for specifying the number of games digested from the previous bonus end or the previous AT end is reset (cleared to 0), The sub-ceiling-related first process ends. Note that the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Ss12 that the game is not an AT rush game, the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is incremented by 1 in Ss13. Thereby, it is possible to specify the number of games digested from the previous bonus end or the previous AT end. In Ss14, it is determined whether or not an operation procedure match flag is set. The operation procedure match flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the operation procedure matches in the second sub-ceiling-related second process, as will be described later.

  When it is determined in Ss14 that the operation procedure match flag is set, the first sub-ceiling related process is terminated. When it is determined in Ss14 that the operation procedure match flag is not set, it is determined in Ss15 whether or not the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is “970” or more. When it is determined that the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is “970” or more, it is determined whether or not the game is one of the six-choice lips 1 to 6 in Ss16. When it is determined NO in Ss15 or Ss16, the sub-ceiling-related first process is ended.

  Note that the slot machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a configuration for notifying the value of the bonus / AT game number counter, but for example, information that is installed above the slot machine 1 and displays the gaming history of the slot machine, etc. The display device (for example, a data counter) informs the player of the number of games that have been consumed since the end of the previous bonus in the slot machine. Note that when the ceiling is approaching (for example, after reaching 970 games), the liquid crystal display 51 may notify the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached. Regardless of whether or not the ceiling is approaching, the number of games digested in accordance with the value of the bonus / AT game number counter in the predetermined display area of the liquid crystal display 51 immediately after the bonus or AT ends. You may always notify (in a game immediately after the bonus or AT ends, for example, a display such as “digestion game: 1G” in a predetermined area on the lower right of the liquid crystal display 51).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Ss16 that the game is one of the six-choice lips 1 to 6, it is possible to specify the operation procedure specified from the operation procedure information output in Se12 of FIG. 36 in Ss17. The navigation effect is executed, a navigation right flag indicating that the navigation effect has been executed in the near-ceiling reach in Ss18 is set, and the navigation-side ceiling-related first process is ended. The immediately preceding navigation execution flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, and is deleted when the next game is started.

  As described above, in the sub-ceiling-related first process, the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is “970” or more even when the AT is not being performed, When it is determined that the game is a winning game, a navigation effect that can specify the operation procedure specified from the operation procedure information output from the main control unit 41 is executed, and the player is operated according to the operation procedure. Can do. In this case, the operation procedure for stopping the left reel 2L for the first time is not used, and a penalty is imposed as described above, but the navigation effect is executed in the first sub-ceiling related process. Even when the left reel 2L is not stopped for the first time in the game, the penalty is not controlled.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the main-side ceiling-related second process executed by the main control unit 41. The main-side ceiling-related second process is executed at a timing related to the end of the game.

  In Se21, it is determined whether or not the game won in any of the 6-option lips 1 to 6 in the non-AT is finished. When it is determined in Se21 that the game selected in any one of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6 in the non-AT has ended, the operation determined in Se11 in FIG. 36 and output to the sub-control unit 91 at the start of the game in Se22 It is determined whether or not the procedure and the operation procedure actually operated in the game ended this time match. As described above, in the slot machine 1 in this embodiment, it is recommended that the left reel 2L be stopped first during non-AT, and the operation procedure determined in Se11 in FIG. Since the operation procedure for first stopping is excluded, in principle, it is not determined YES in Se22 during non-AT. However, as shown by Ss15 to Ss17 in FIG. 37, a navigation effect is executed when the ceiling is approaching, and in this case, it is determined YES in Se22 even during non-AT.

  If it is determined in Se22 that the operation procedure is the same, it is determined in Ss15 in FIG. 37 that the value of the bonus / AT game number counter is “970” or more and the ceiling is approaching, and a navigation effect is executed in Ss17. In this case, the immediately preceding ceiling flag indicating that the ceiling is approaching is set, and the main-side ceiling-related second process is terminated. The immediately preceding ceiling flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41.

  On the other hand, if the game ended in Se21 is not non-AT or if none of the 6-choice lips 1 to 6 has been won, and if it is determined that the operation procedure does not match in Se22, it may not be close to the ceiling. Since the property is high, the main ceiling related second process is terminated as it is.

  Note that in Se11 and Se12 in FIG. 36, according to the types of the selected 6-choice lip 1-6, the operation procedure is not a Lip 4 winning and the operation procedure excluding the operation procedure for making the left reel 2L the first stop. Although one operation procedure is determined from among them, information that can specify the operation procedure is output, and in Ss17 of FIG. 37, an example of executing a navigation effect that specifies the determined one operation procedure has been described. Not limited to this, for example, in the main control unit 41, according to the type of the selected 6-option lip 1-6, an operation procedure for not making the lip 4 winning and making the left reel 2L the first stop is performed. Information that can specify all the operating procedures is output, and the sub-control unit 91 determines one operating procedure from the operating procedures specified from the information, and executes a navigation effect that specifies the operating procedure. You may do it. In this case, in Se22, it is determined whether or not the operation procedure actually operated in the game ended this time is included in the operation procedure output at the start of the game. The ceiling immediately preceding flag may be set.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-ceiling-related second process executed by the sub-control unit 91. The sub-side ceiling-related second process is executed at a timing related to the end of the game.

  In Ss31, it is determined whether or not the immediately preceding ceiling navigation execution flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the game that has been finished this time is a game in which a navigation effect has been executed immediately before reaching the ceiling.

  When it is determined in Ss31 that the immediately preceding ceiling navigation execution flag is set, the operation procedure specified from the operation procedure information output in Se12 of FIG. 36 in Ss32 and the operation actually operated in the game ended this time It is determined whether or not the procedure matches.

  When it is determined in Ss32 that the operation procedure is the same, since the flag just before the ceiling is set on the main control unit 41 side and it is possible to specify that the ceiling is approaching, it is specified that the operation procedure is the same in Ss33. Operation procedure matching flag is set, and the sub-side ceiling-related second process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect of Ss17 from being repeatedly executed in the game up to the ceiling. The operation procedure match flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, and is maintained until the fourth condition is satisfied when the ceiling is reached or until a bonus winning / AT is entered.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Ss31 that the immediately preceding navigation execution flag is not set, or when it is determined in Ss32 that the operation procedure does not match, the sub-ceiling-related second processing is terminated as it is.

  Thereby, the main control part 41 can specify that it is near the ceiling arrival by setting the flag immediately before the ceiling.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, when it is determined once as YES in Se <b> 22 in the main control unit 41, the example in which it is determined that the ceiling is approaching and the immediately preceding ceiling flag is set has been described. Not limited to this, the main control unit 41 determines that the operation procedure matches in the game won in the 6-option lip in the non-AT, and then the game procedure won in the next 6-option lip also matches. When it is determined, it may be determined that the ceiling is approaching, and the immediately preceding ceiling flag may be set. In addition to the two consecutive games, when it is determined that the operation procedure is the same in three or more games, it may be determined that the ceiling is approaching. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 may be configured to execute the navigation effect in the six-choice lip winning game for the number of times required for the main control unit 41 to determine that the ceiling is approaching. Thereby, when the navigation effect is not being executed, it is determined that the player mistakenly matches the operation procedure with one operation procedure determined by the main control unit 41 by accident, and it is erroneously determined that the player is approaching the ceiling. Inconvenience can be avoided. That is, when it is determined that the main control unit 41 is approaching the ceiling, it is possible to improve the accuracy that the effect state on the sub-control unit 91 is actually approaching the ceiling.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing related to the setting of the confirmed notification completed flag and the strong watermelon continuous effect flag will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the main-side effect specifying process executed by the main control unit 41. In the main-side effect specifying process, after the bonus is won, the bonus control is executed by the sub-control unit 91, or after the bonus winning is confirmed, or the strong control by the sub-control unit 91 according to the strong watermelon winning. It is specified whether or not the continuous production for watermelon is being executed. The main-side effect specifying process is executed at a timing related to the start of the game. More specifically, the main-side effect specifying process is included in the internal lottery process in the game process, and is executed after the internal lottery is completed and before the freeze effect lottery process described above is executed. .

  First, in Se31, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning (including a bonus winning game) is in progress. When it is determined in Se31 that the bonus is being won, it is determined whether or not the confirmed notification flag has already been set.

  When it is determined in Se32 that the confirmed notification flag is not set, that is, when it is determined that the bonus winning has not been confirmed yet, the winning for specifying the number of games digested after winning the bonus in Se33 The value of the medium game number counter is incremented by 1, and it is determined in Se34 whether or not the value of the winning game number counter has reached “6”. Note that the value of the winning game number counter is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41.

  When it is determined in Se34 that the value of the number-of-winning game counter has reached “6”, since it is after the bonus winning is confirmed by the result of the bonus continuous effect over 5 games, it is confirmed in Se35. The informed flag is set, the value of the winning game counter is reset (cleared to 0) in Se36, and the process proceeds to Se37. Note that the confirmed notification flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41. The set state of the confirmed notification flag is maintained at least until a winning bonus is won.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus is not won in Se31, when it is determined that the confirmed notification flag is set in Se32, or the value of the winning game number counter reaches “6” in Se34. If it is determined that there is no, the process proceeds to Se37.

  In Se37, it is determined whether or not a strong watermelon is won alone, not at the same time as the bonus. If it is determined in Se37 that the strong watermelon alone has been won, the strong watermelon continuous effect flag is set in Se38, and the main-side effect specifying process ends. The strong watermelon continuous performance in-progress flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41. The setting state of the strong watermelon continuous effect flag is maintained at least until the strong watermelon continuous effect ends (3 games are consumed).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Se37 that the strong watermelon alone is not won, the main-side effect specifying process is terminated as it is.

  As a result, the main control unit 41 identifies that the bonus has been won and that the bonus has already been won by the fact that the confirmed notice flag has been set, and the continuous effect for strong watermelon is identified. By setting the middle flag, it is possible to specify that the strong watermelon continuous production by the strong watermelon winning in which the AT lottery having higher advantage than the strong cherry winning is performed is being executed.

  Next, of the processes performed on the sub-control unit 91 side, the net increment counting process will be described.

  The sub-control unit 91 counts the net increase during the AT by executing the net increase counting process. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes a net increase notification effect in which the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the counted net increase by executing a net increase notification process. Furthermore, the sub-control unit 91 executes an AT start effect by notifying the remaining number of AT games by the liquid crystal display 51 by executing an AT start effect process.

  Here, the count of the net increase during AT will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing the transition of the counted net increase in medals and the reported net increase.

  In this embodiment, after being controlled by AT at RT1, it is not immediately promoted to RT2, which is advantageous to the player, but at RT1, one of the three-choice lips 4-6 is won and a navigation effect is performed. As a result, it is promoted to RT2 for the first time by winning the Lip 5 (Special Lip). That is, if the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R according to the navigation effect based on the winning of any of the three-choice lips 4 to 6, and as a result, a special lip is won, the player is promoted to RT2. On the other hand, if the player mistakenly operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R without following the navigation effect and, as a result, wins Lip 3 (falling-down Lip), the process proceeds to RT3.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs the AT game number notification process by shifting to RT2 in accordance with the navigation effect or falling to RT3 without following the navigation effect, and displays the number of AT games of one set of 50 games in the liquid crystal display. This is displayed on the display 51. The displayed number of AT games is counted down every time one AT game is consumed.

  Further, in this embodiment, after being controlled by the AT, the sub-control unit 91 first resets the count of the net increment during the AT to “0” by the net increment count process, and starts counting the net increment. Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs the net increase notification effect when the operation proceeds to RT2 according to the navigation effect or falls to RT3 without following the navigation effect, and the liquid crystal display 51 displays the counted value of the net increase. To display.

  Here, since the winning probability of replay is higher in RT2 than in RT1, the net increase tends to increase as compared with RT1. On the other hand, since RT1 is less likely to win a replay than RT2, the net increase tends to decrease. For this reason, the net increase in medals is likely to decrease until it is promoted to RT2 after being controlled by the AT in RT1, and is likely to increase after being promoted to RT2. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the net increase is notified by the net increase notification effect, if the counted net increase is less than “0” (that is, minus), the actual net increase is counted. Regardless of the value (minus value), “0” is displayed.

  More specifically, at RT1, the transition to RT2 is performed according to the navigation effect, or when the AT game of one set 50 games starts after falling to RT3 without following the navigation effect, it is counted by the net increment counting process. If the net increment is equal to or less than “0”, the sub-control unit 91 resets the counted value of the net increment to “0”. Then, the sub-control unit 91 again counts the net increase from the time when the AT game of one set 50 games is started. On the other hand, if the net increment counted by the net increment counting process is “1” or more when the AT game of one set 50 game is started, the sub-control unit 91 continues the value of the counted net increment as it is. Use.

  For example, FIG. 41 (a) shows the transition of the counted net increase of medals and the notified net increase when transitioning from RT1 during AT to RT2 according to the navigation effect. In FIG. 41 (a), the vertical axis represents the net increase, and the horizontal axis represents the number of games during AT. The count of the net increase is started from the time when the control to the AT is started in RT1.

  Then, when one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won at a predetermined timing, an AT start effect informing that the AT game of one set of 50 games has started is executed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the number of AT games Subtraction starts.

  Further, when the AT start effect is executed, a net increase notification effect for notifying the counted net increase is executed. Here, since the gaming state of RT1 is from the AT control until one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the count of the net increase after the AT control is started tends to decrease. For this reason, when one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the net increase count may be “0” or less. When the count of the net increase is “0” or less, an effect of notifying that the net increase is 0 is executed as the net increase notification effect.

  In this embodiment, if any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the count is “0” if the count of the net increase is “0” or less regardless of whether or not the promotion is promoted to RT2 according to the navigation effect. Reset to. Thereafter, as shown in the example of FIG. 41A, when the special lip is won by following the navigation effect and the process proceeds to RT2, the net increase tends to increase. Therefore, the display of the net increase on the liquid crystal display 51 is also “ It increases from “0”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 41 (b) shows the transition of the counted number of medals and the reported number of net increases when falling from RT1 during AT to RT3 without following the navigation effect. In the example of FIG. 41 (b), as in the example of FIG. 41 (a), the count of the net increase is started when the control to the AT is started in RT1.

  Then, when the game won in any of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is finished, an AT start effect for notifying that the AT game of one set 50 games has started is executed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the next Subtraction of the number of AT games is started from the game.

  Further, when the AT start effect is executed, a net increase notification effect for notifying the counted net increase is executed. Here, since the gaming state of RT1 is from the AT control until one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the count of the net increase after the AT control is started tends to decrease. For this reason, when one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, the net increase count may be “0” or less.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, if any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6 is won, regardless of whether or not it is promoted to RT2 according to the navigation effect, if the count of the net increase is “0” or less, the count is “ It is reset to “0”. Thereafter, as shown in the example of FIG. 41 (b), when the player falls into the fall lip and falls to RT3 because he did not follow the navigation effect, the net increase tends to further decrease, and the liquid crystal display 51 displays the net increase. “0” is also displayed.

  Thus, even if the net increase in medals at the AT from RT1 to RT2, which is more advantageous than RT1, is less than “0”, the net increase is set to “0” when shifting to RT2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player the impression that the net increase after the AT start effect is executed is reduced.

  It should be noted that the value of the net increment counted when the net increment counted by the net increment counting process is less than “0” is not limited to “0”, and for example, the net increment of the medal is “10”. ”Or“ −10 ”may be used as the reference value.

  In RT3 where the ratio of staying is the highest, after the AT is confirmed and notified, it does not immediately shift to RT2, which is advantageous to the player, but after that, 6-choice lip 1-5 is won in RT3 and the promotion replay is After winning the prize and moving to RT1, 3 choice lips 4 to 6 are elected in RT1 and the special replay wins, and then it moves to RT2 for the first time. Counting is started. For this reason, the net increase in medals decreases after the notification of AT confirmation is made and before the transition to RT2, and then increases after the transition to RT2. The net increment displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 displays the value of the net increment counter only when the value of the net increment counter is 1 or more, while when the value of the net increment counter is 0 or less, the net increment is displayed. Regardless of the counter value, 0 is always displayed.

  When AT confirmation is issued and AT control is started, counting of the value of the net increment counter is started at that point, but less than 0 until special lip wins and RT2 is entered. Then, the process proceeds to RT2, and until the value of the net increment counter becomes 1 or more, 0 is displayed as the net increment on the liquid crystal display 51, and the value of the net increment counter is 0. The value of the net increment counter is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a net increment from the time when the value exceeds.

  In addition, when the special lip is won and the AT start effect is performed, there is a high possibility that the value of the net increment counter does not exceed zero. In such a case, when the AT start effect is performed, the value of the net increment counter is cleared to 0, and counting of the net increment counter is started again, and the AT start effect is performed. Thereafter, the net increment displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is increased at an earlier stage than when the value of the net increment counter is not cleared. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the player the impression that the net increase after the AT start effect is performed is reduced.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the above-described embodiment, when the freeze is won by the freeze lottery of Se4 or Se9 in FIG. 24, the reel production period is set as shown by Sf1, Sf8, etc. in FIG. It is possible to control to a freeze state in which the progress of is delayed for a predetermined period. In addition, when controlled to the freeze state, a reel effect (for example, see FIGS. 30 to 33) determined by freeze lottery can be executed.

  In the reel effect during the freeze, the reel rotation control data is set and executed in Sf1 of FIG. 28, whereby the reels 2L to 2R can be started to rotate in the same manner as normal (see FIG. 30). Thereby, operation to stop switch 8L-8R can be promoted like usual.

  If any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated within a predetermined operation reception period during the reel production, a result lottery is performed as indicated by Sf7 in FIG. 28, and the determination result is obtained in Sf8. The corresponding result control data is set, and the temporary display result is stopped. When the push order effect, the eye effect, and the two-stage effect are executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the “777” stop pattern is determined to be the outlier stop pattern, and the temporary display result is “Red 7”. ”Can be stopped on the winning line LN (see FIGS. 31 and 32). Further, when the cherry effect is being executed, one of the four patterns shown in FIG. 29B is determined, and the temporary display result is a single cherry, a double cherry, a triple cherry, and a missed line. It can be stopped on the LN (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is not operated within a predetermined operation reception period during the reel effect, the temporary display result is shifted to the normal reel control without being stopped.

  Further, as a temporary display result, the execution of the “777” stop pattern stops the “red 7” triples (winning eyes), and stops the double cherries and triple cherries, Advantageous benefits are granted. As shown in FIG. 35, when the “red 7” set of three (winning items) is stopped, a bonus is given as a privilege, and when a double cherry or triple cherry is stopped, The AT lottery is performed in the same manner as when the strong cherry or the strongest cherry is won. Thereby, it is suggested that a privilege is given by the temporary display result stopped according to the operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R in the reel effect during the freeze. For this reason, it is possible to improve the player's degree of intervention in the game during the reel production during the freeze. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the freeze and the reel production execution period.

  (1-2) In the embodiment described above, it is possible to win a freeze by winning a push order bell as shown in FIG. 25. During the freeze, a push order effect as shown in FIG. Is executed. When the push order effect is executed, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect such as how to operate the stop switches 8L to 8R. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the freeze and the reel production execution period.

  (2-1) In the embodiment described above, regarding the cherries that may be missed depending on the operation procedure, the main control unit 41 determines the “appearance rate” or “digestion game from the previous appearance” according to the number of digestion games and the occurrence of a cherry winning. A process of updating information for specifying the number "is performed. In addition, when the freeze win is triggered by the cherry win, the appearance frequency of the cherry is specified based on the “appearance rate” and “the number of digested games from the previous appearance” (see FIG. 27), as shown in FIG. The lower the cherry appearance frequency, the higher the cherry production is selected as the reel production. When the cherry appearance frequency is lower than the minimum level, the cherry production is always selected. As a result, in the cherry effect during freezing, as shown in FIG. 33, the symbol combination composed of “cherry” symbols such as “single cherry”, “double cherry”, “triple cherry”, etc. is stopped as a temporary display result. Can be made. In other words, when the appearance frequency of cherries specified by the main control unit 41 is lower than the average normal level and more than three times lower than the normal level, the freeze is triggered by the cherry winning. In this case, the cherry effect is always selected, and the symbol combination composed of the “cherry” symbols can be stopped as a temporary display result. For this reason, even when the appearance frequency of cherries is far from the normal level, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the “cherry” symbol is not stopped easily by performing the same control as before. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of dissatisfaction and distrust due to the fact that the appearance frequency of the “cherry” symbol is too low.

  Further, even if the “cherry” symbol is stopped during the freeze, no cherry prize is generated, so that it is possible to prevent a medal from being paid out beyond the design value. Further, the cherry effect can be performed during the freeze according to the degree of occurrence of the cherry prize, and the “cherry” symbol can be stopped.

  Also, the appearance frequency of cherries is specified from both “appearance rate” and “number of digested games since previous appearance”, and either “appearance rate” or “number of digested games since previous appearance” is at the lowest level. Although not reached, the rate at which the “cherry” symbol is stopped can also be improved when the other has reached the lowest level.

  (2-2) In the above-described embodiment, when a single cherry or the like is stopped at a normal time and a cherry is won, a medal is paid out as a privilege and an AT lottery is performed as shown in FIG. Is notified. In addition, even during freezing, when a single cherry or the like is stopped, it is notified that an AT lottery is performed as a privilege. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved by stopping the single cherry or the like regardless of whether it is frozen or normal.

  (2-3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, when the double cherries or triple cherries are stopped rather than when the single cherries are stopped at any time of normal time and freezing. The AT lottery is performed in a manner that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player has a great expectation by stopping the double cherries and the triple cherries rather than the single cherries. On the other hand, when the cherry effect is executed during the freeze, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of promotion from a single cherry to a double cherry or a triple cherry. For this reason, when the cherry effect is executed during the freeze, the player can be expected to be promoted from a single cherry to a double cherry or a triple cherry, and the game during the cherry production Interest can be improved.

  (3-1) In the above-described embodiment, the cherry effect during freezing can be executed with a weak cherry winning as an opportunity, as shown in FIG. When the cherry is selected, a navigation effect such as “Aim for the cherry!” Is executed. For this reason, there is a high possibility that a single cherry is stopped as a display result before the cherry effect is executed. As a result, when a single cherry is stopped, a freeze occurs and the cherry effect is executed, and then the expectation for promotion to a double cherry or triple cherry that is more advantageous to the player than the single cherry It can make you feel. On the other hand, cherry is a winning combination that can be missed. For this reason, depending on the operation procedure (operation timing), a single cherry may not be stopped as a display result. In this case, even if a freeze occurs and a cherry effect is executed, after the pre-result control data is added in Sf10 of FIG. 28 and the single cherry is stopped as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Reel production to be promoted to double or triple cherry starts. In other words, even when the single cherry is not stopped before the cherry effect is started without being operated in the predetermined procedure, the same state as that when the single cherry is stopped before the cherry effect is started after the cherry effect is started is set. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it was possible to operate according to the predetermined procedure and whether or not the single cherry was stopped before freezing, in the same situation, after the freeze occurred and the cherry effect was executed, It is possible to have a sense of expectation for promotion to a double cherry or triple cherry, which is highly advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the cherry production.

  (3-2) In the embodiment described above, the single cherries, the double cherries, and the triple cherries are outcomes that are not stopped unless the cherries are won in the internal lottery. On the other hand, in the cherry effect during the freeze, the single cherry, the double cherry, and the triple cherry are stopped regardless of the result of the internal lottery. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during execution of the cherry effect during the freeze.

  (3-3) In the cherry effect during freezing in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), after the reel effect that promotes from a single cherry to a double cherry is executed, two more It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a reel production to be promoted to a triple cherry in which an AT lottery is performed in an advantageous manner over the cherry will be executed. In other words, during execution of the cherry effect during the freeze, it is possible to have a sense of expectation divided into a plurality of stages, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4-1) In the reel effect during the freeze of the above-described embodiment, the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in the normal state, but when one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated, the reels 2L to 2R are operated. The reel stop control is performed in a manner different from that in the normal state, such as stopping everything or stopping the drawing according to the result control data without restriction on the number of drawn frames. As a result, the reeling that is stopped is different from the stopping that is stopped by reel control in the normal state (the outcome for progressing the game, the outcome for generating a prize). It is possible to notify that it is a stop-out at. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player mistakenly recognizes that the stop appearance in the reel effect during freezing is the stop output that is stopped by the reel control in the normal time. As a result, the confusion caused by the reel effect being performed during the freeze and the stoppage being stopped can be avoided, and the entertainment of the game during the freeze can be improved.

  (4-2) In the above-described embodiment, depending on the mode in which the output is stopped, the output is stopped by the reel control in the normal state or stopped by the reel effect during the freeze. It is possible to notify whether the eye is identifiable.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the AT lottery is performed as the grant of a privilege even when reaching the ceiling.

  Among these, when reaching the ceiling, ten navigation stocks are given, and therefore, the control is performed to AT + RT2 for about 10 × 50 games = 500 games. Further, when AT + RT2, the probability of deviation from the number of determination values shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 is low, and replay is won with high probability, and navigation effects are executed when winning the left bell, middle bell, and right bell. Therefore, if the operating procedure is not mistaken, it will be a bell prize. As a result, when controlled to AT + RT2, the number of medals to be paid out is larger than the number of medals used for the bet number. If an average of one medal per game in AT + RT2 is increased, 500 × 1 = 500 medals can be obtained after reaching the ceiling.

  On the other hand, when a bonus is won, 500 or more medals cannot be obtained as shown in FIG. Similarly, if a weak cherry is won, 500 or more medals cannot be acquired from the number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired. Therefore, when the bonus winning and the weak cherry winning are compared with the ceiling arrival, reaching the ceiling has a higher advantage for the player.

  Further, it is suggested that reaching the ceiling is always established when 1000 games are consumed from the end of the previous bonus or the end of the previous AT, and is recognized among players. For this reason, for example, it is suggested that there is a little remaining until reaching the ceiling at a specific timing where the remaining 30 games are up to 1000 games. As a result, after the specific timing of the remaining 30 games, even if medals for games up to 1000 games are consumed, there is a sense of expectation for reaching the ceiling, and a freeze effect is executed by winning a bonus or weak cherry. If the bonus winning or AT entry is notified, the player will be dissatisfied.

  However, as shown in FIG. 24, even when a bonus win or a weak cherry win is selected, if the immediately preceding ceiling flag indicating that the ceiling is approaching is set, the freeze lottery is not performed and the freeze effect is performed. It is prohibited to be executed.

  As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation that a privilege according to the freeze effect will be granted while preventing the player from being dissatisfied as much as possible by executing the freeze effect. Can do.

  (6) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, even if a bonus is won, medals are spent for setting the number of bets until a bonus is won, but no bonus is won in the internal lottery. Some slot machines have a replay probability higher than usual in a gaming state (RT4 in the slot machine 1) controlled by winning a bonus. In such a case, the gaming state is maintained. Since the player has a higher advantage for the player, there is a possibility that the game may be played so as to intentionally delay the bonus winning. In order to eliminate such inconveniences, in the slot machine field, when a bonus is won, a bonus confirmation notification is given in order to win a bonus as soon as possible, and AT lottery that may promote a delay in bonus winning is not performed. This is also recognized among players. For this reason, the slot machine 1 in this embodiment is also configured so that AT lottery is not performed during RT4 or bonus, as indicated by Ss2 in FIG. For this reason, when the weak cherry is won in a state other than RT4 or in a bonus state, the advantage for the player is lower when winning in the state of RT4 or bonus. As a result, if a notification is made by performing a freeze effect by a weak cherry win during a bonus or after a bonus winner is confirmed in RT4, the player will be dissatisfied. End up.

  However, the freeze effect lottery process shown in FIG. 24 is executed when the gaming state is other than the bonus, and even when the weak cherry is won, the bonus is being won and the confirmed notification flag is set. 24. If it is suggested that the bonus is being won, it is determined YES in Se1 in FIG. 24 or YES in Se3, so that the freeze lottery (Se9) triggered by the weak cherry win is not performed and the weak It is forbidden to perform freeze production triggered by the winning of cherry.

  In addition, the freeze effect triggered by the bonus winning is executed after the bonus winning confirmation has been notified, suggesting that the bonus is being won, rather than when the bonus winning is confirmed. When playing, the player's advantage is lower. This is because the player has already been informed that a bonus has been won. As a result, in the case where the bonus winning confirmation has been notified, if the bonus winning is repeatedly notified by executing the freeze effect triggered by the bonus winning, the player is dissatisfied.

  However, in the freeze effect lottery process shown in FIG. 24, even when the bonus is won, if the bonus win is confirmed and the fact that the bonus has already been announced has been announced, the freeze lottery is not performed. It is forbidden to perform freeze production.

  As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation that a privilege according to the freeze effect will be granted while preventing the player from being dissatisfied as much as possible by executing the freeze effect. Can do.

  (7) As shown by Se11 and Se12 in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 in the above-described embodiment determines one operation procedure when winning one of the 6-choice lip 1-6. Operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is output to the sub-control unit 91. As shown in Ss15 and subsequent steps in FIG. 37, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the 6-option 1 is selected when the value of the bonus / AT game number counter has reached “970” or more and the remaining ceiling is small. In the game which is elected to any one of -6, a navigation effect for specifying the operation procedure specified from the operation procedure information is executed, and the player is operated according to the operation procedure. As shown by Se22 and Se23 in FIG. 38, the main control unit 41 can specify that the ceiling is approaching when the operation procedure is matched. As a result, on the main control unit 41 side, it is possible to determine whether or not the execution of the freeze effect should be prohibited in consideration of the effect state controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  (8) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the combination of Lip 5 “Bell-Lip a-Bell” for controlling to RT2 that is higher than RT1 to notify that it has been controlled is the winning line LN When deriving upward, “Lip b-Lip a-Lip a”, which is a combination composed only of symbols having the same and / or similar outer shape, is simultaneously stopped on the line LM4 different from the winning line LN. For this reason, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the control is performed to RT2, which is highly necessary to notify that it is controlled.

  Furthermore, according to the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, the following problems can be solved. In the conventional slot machine, generally, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R until the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped is a predetermined time (for example, 190 ms (milliseconds). )). For this reason, when providing a winning combination that does not miss out regardless of the operation timing, each winning combination is configured within a range that can be drawn in within a predetermined time in each reel (within 5 frames in this embodiment). It is necessary to arrange the pattern to be. As a result, the greater the number of winning combinations that do not miss, the more types of dedicated symbols that make up each winning combination.

  On the other hand, symbols as identification information drawn on a plurality of (usually three) reels cannot be provided indefinitely, and some restrictions are imposed. For example, the number of symbols drawn on each of the three reels is limited to a maximum of 21 per reel, and the number of symbols drawn on the three reels is limited to a maximum of 10 types in total.

  When such a conventional slot machine is used as a background, for example, when a transition combination accompanied by a transition to a predetermined gaming state is to be configured with the same design, a small role (for example, bell 1) or replaying Similar to a general combination such as a combination (for example, Lip 1), it is necessary to prepare a dedicated symbol for a transition combination. For this reason, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to design a dedicated symbol for a transitional role within the limits of the number and types of symbols. Also, in the case where the transitional combination can be won by stopping the reels in a predetermined pushing order (so-called correct pushing order), the transitional combination is configured within the range that can be drawn in within a predetermined time. Since it is necessary to arrange symbols, the number of dedicated symbols has to be increased, and there is a possibility that the design becomes more difficult.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the symbol on the winning combination line LN of the transitional role for controlling to RT2 higher than RT1 that needs to be notified that the control has been performed. Instead of making the combination a non-specific combination (a combination of different types of symbols), “Lip b-Lip” is a combination consisting only of symbols having the same and / or similar outer shape on the line LM4 different from the winning line LN. “a-lip a” was configured to be stopped simultaneously. As a result, it is not always necessary to provide a dedicated symbol for the transitional role, and it is possible to avoid increasing the number and types of symbols, and that the control is performed within the limits of the number, types, and arrangement of symbols. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the control is performed to RT2, which is highly necessary to be notified.

  (9) In the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, since the subtraction of the number of AT games is started by being controlled by RT2, it is highly necessary for RT2 to notify that it has been controlled. When controlled to such RT2, “lip b-lip a-lip a” is derived on the LM4 so that the player can clearly recognize that the subtraction of the AT game number is started. be able to.

  (10) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, since the difference in the degree of advantage from the gaming state before the control changes more greatly than when the RT1 is controlled by the RT2, the RT2 is controlled. There is a high need to notify that this has been done. When controlled by RT2, “Lip b-Lip a-Lip a” is derived on LM4, so that the difference in the degree of advantage from the gaming state before the control is larger than when controlled by RT1. The change can be clearly recognized by the player.

  (11) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode changes more than the degree of change in the effect mode before and after the control to RT1 by being controlled by RT2, so RT2 indicates that it has been controlled. There is a high need for notification. When controlled to such RT2, “lip b-lip a-lip a” is derived on LM4, so that the effect mode changes more than the degree of change of the effect mode before and after control to RT1. The player can be clearly recognized.

  (12) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, since the ratio of notifying the navigation effect is higher than when RT1 is controlled by RT2, it is necessary for RT2 to notify that it is controlled. Is expensive. When such a control is performed on RT2, “lip b-lip a-lip a” is derived on LM4, so that the player is notified that the ratio of informing the navigation effect is higher than that in RT1. Can be clearly recognized.

  (13) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, since the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when it is RT1 by being controlled by RT2, it is necessary for RT2 to notify that it has been controlled. Is expensive. It is clear to the player that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when it is RT1 by deriving “Lip b-Lip a-Lip a” on LM4 when controlled to RT2. Can be recognized.

  (14) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, when the game is controlled by RT2, the game progress is controlled for freezing over a set delay period, so that “lip b-lip a-lip a” is displayed on LM4. "And the player can be made to clearly recognize that the control to RT2 is performed more reliably.

  (15) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the navigation stock to be controlled by the RT 2 is given and, after being controlled by the AT, the three-choice lips 4 to 6 among the plural types of winning combinations are determined and specified. Even if the net increase after the start of AT is negative with respect to “0” before the control is performed to RT2 by deriving the display result, the net increase is reduced when the AT start effect is executed. Since the subsequent count is performed after returning to “0”, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the net increase after the start of AT is decreasing.

  (16) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, when the AT start effect is executed, counting of the number of AT games to be determined for the end condition is started even if the control is not performed to RT2. Therefore, when the navigation effect is performed in the AT, the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R in the operation mode specified by the navigation effect can be prompted.

  (17) In the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, the output of the ART signal is not included in the period in which the medal IN signal or the medal OUT signal is output after the next game is newly started. Since the output of the ART signal is continued until the timing is reached, the time required for the external device such as the calling lamp device 200 to receive the ART signal can be secured without hindering the progress of the game, and the medal IN Since the output of the ART signal does not end when outputting the signal, the medal OUT signal, etc., the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, etc. received on the external device side such as the calling lamp device 200 are in RT2. It can be easily specified whether or not.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, in a game in which a navigation effect is executed during an AT, when it is determined that the operation is performed in a procedure different from the operation procedure specified from the navigation effect, a penalty in the AT that is disadvantageous to the player Control is performed. Thereby, for example, in the game in which the 6-choice lip 3-6 is won during RT3, the operation procedure for winning the lip 4 even though the navigation effect for winning the lip 4 is not executed. To prevent the inconvenience of being stopped when it should not have been stopped, such as “lip a / lip b-lip a-bell” being stopped as a display result during RT3. Can do.

  (19) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, an ART signal can be output when a Lip 5 winning as a trigger for controlling RT2 is established and control to RT2 is started. The control timing for RT2 can be appropriately specified on the side.

  If there is a slight difference between the Lip 5 winning timing and the timing to start control of RT2 due to the interrupt processing (for example, it is determined that the Lip 5 winning is determined in one interrupt processing and the next In the case where the control to RT2 is started in the interrupt process), the ART signal may be output at the time of 7 lip winning.

  (20) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the ART signal is output for at least a predetermined period (2 seconds). Therefore, the ART signal can be reliably detected even in an old external device that requires a relatively long time to detect the ART signal.

  (21) In the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, as shown in Sk110 to Sk113 in FIG. 10, FIG. 13, and FIG. 15, a new start is started until 2000 ms elapses after the output of the ART signal is started. When the played game ends, the output of the ART signal ends when the output of the medal IN signal, which is different from that at the end of the game at the specific timing, is completed. Therefore, the ART signal can be reliably detected in the external device, and the received medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, etc. are signals in RT2 depending on whether the detection timing is a specific timing or a predetermined timing different from the specific timing. It can be clearly specified whether or not.

  Note that the specific timing and the game end time are not necessarily the same, and a slight deviation may occur. For example, it may be determined that the next game has actually ended in one interrupt process and determined to have reached a specific timing in the next interrupt process.

  (22) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Sa14, Sa16, FIG. 14 and the like in FIG. 8, when the power interruption is restored during the ART signal output, the ART signal is at least for a predetermined period after the restoration. Is output. For this reason, even if power interruption occurs during the output of the ART signal, the ART device can reliably receive the ART signal after the return.

  (23) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Sa15, Sa16, FIG. 14 and the like in FIG. 8, when the gaming state when the power interruption is restored is RT2, at least a predetermined period after the restoration. The ART signal is output over the entire period. For this reason, it is possible to specify whether or not the gaming state after the interruption of power interruption is RT2 on the external device side, and even if RT2 of the previous day is restored at the time of opening the store, It can be recognized as RT2 today.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modified examples applicable to the present invention will be described.

[Distinction between reel control during normal operation and reel production during delay control]
In the above-described embodiment, as an effect to be executed during the period in which the freeze is generated, the reel rotation control is performed in the same manner as in the normal time to change (rotate) all reels, and then the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated. Depending on the situation, a reel effect is performed to stop a predetermined number (a specific number of “red 7”, a specific number such as a single cherry, a double cherry, a triple cherry, etc.) An example has been described in which it is possible to specify that the reel effect during the freeze is specified by the symbol stop mode at the time of stopping the turn by performing control for this purpose (hereinafter also referred to as reel effect control). However, the manner of notifying the fact that the reel effect is being frozen is not limited to this. For example, as another example of a mode different from the normal time for a predetermined output, for example, a mode in which the stopped output is slightly swung may be used. A mode in which the reels are stopped at a position where they are misaligned, or a mode in which the reels are synchronized and rotated slowly so as to be aligned in a straight line without stopping a predetermined output may be employed. Further, it is not limited to the fact that the reel effect during freezing is specified in a manner that can be specified by the operation mode of the reel, but may be specified in a manner that can be specified by a mode of effect means that is separate from the reel.

  As the production means, for example, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, which are light emitting means provided inside the operation buttons of the stop switch (or around the operation buttons) corresponding to the stop switches 8L to 8R, 22R may be used. In this case, for example, the main control unit 41 causes the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R to emit light during normal reel control (for example, lighting an LED corresponding to a rotating reel) It is possible to specify the reel effect during the freeze by controlling the light emission in a different light emission mode during freeze (for example, flashing mode, lighting mode different from normal lighting mode, off mode, etc.) You may make it alert | report to. Accordingly, when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the reel effect during the freeze is based on the light emission modes of the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R. It is possible to notify whether the display result related to the presence or absence of the winning is to be stopped or the result of being frozen is to be stopped. In addition, when an operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R can be effectively accepted, a light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit that is lit in the normal state may emit light in a predetermined manner.

  Further, as the production means, for example, speakers 53 and 54 that are sound output means may be used. In this case, for example, during execution of the reel effect during freezing, the sub-control unit 91 outputs special game sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 that are not output during the reel control during normal time. You may make it alert | report so that it is a reel production | presentation in a freeze. As a result, a special game sound is output, so that it is possible to recognize that it is a reel effect during freezing, and whether the display result related to the presence or absence of winning is stopped by the operation or the outcome during freezing is stopped. Can be notified.

  In this case, the game sound that is differentiated between the reel control during the normal time and the reel effect during the freeze may be an operation sound output when any of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated. For example, while the operation sound during the reel control during the normal time is output as a “do!” Sound, the operation sound during the reel effect during the freeze may be output as a “pick!” Sound. . Thereby, it can be notified from the operation sound output when performing the operation whether the display result relating to the presence or absence of the winning is stopped by the operation or the result of freezing is stopped.

[Derived control during delay]
In the above-described embodiment, the freeze period is illustrated as an example of the delay period, and as examples of the derivation control during delay, the push order effect, the target effect, the two-stage effect, and the cherry effect are illustrated with reference to FIGS. explained. However, the derivation control during delay is not limited to these as long as the temporary display result is derived after the variable display device variably displays a plurality of types of identification information during the delay period. For example, after starting the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R during the freeze, when one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated, a reel different from the reel corresponding to the stop switch (for example, the stop switch 8L When the reel 2R) is operated, a privilege is granted when the reel 2R) is stopped, and a reel effect is performed such that when the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped, the privilege is not granted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, for the push order effect, after accepting the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R in Sf4, according to the result lottery of Sf7, “Red 7” 3 Although an example of stopping an assortment or an outlier has been described, the present invention is not limited to the case where the result is determined first and the outcome according to the result is stopped.

  When it is determined that the push order effect is to be executed, the correct answer push order (first stop reel) is determined at a predetermined timing from when the determination is made until when the operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R of Sf4 is accepted. However, if the stop operation is performed in the determined pressing order, the winning combination “red 7” is stopped, and if the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the determined pressing order, it is off. You may make it stop an output. The correct answer pressing order may be determined randomly, for example, by random number lottery or the like, or may be a pressing order for winning a bell in the selected pressing order bell at the time of pressing order bell winning.

  When configured in this way, a sound such as “3-choice challenge!” May be output from the speakers 53 and 54 simultaneously with the start of the push order effect. Then, when the player operates the stop switches 8L to 8R in the pressing order that matches the determined correct answer pressing order, the player stops all three “red 7” as the winning item and presses the correct answer When the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated in a pushing order other than the order, the slippage is stopped. For example, when the correct answer pressing order is “the left reel 2L is first stopped”, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time, the navigation system is stopped by stopping the three sets of “red 7”. It may indicate that a privilege such as stock or AT lottery is given, and a sound such as “correct answer!” May be output. On the other hand, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped, the break-out point is stopped and a sound such as “Sorry! The correct answer is left!” Is output. By executing such a push order effect, a so-called “three-choice question (three-choice mission)” can be presented to the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example where the freeze win is won only in the ratio shown in FIG. 25 when the push order bell is won is explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correct answer is obtained when the push bell is won. Freezing may be generated at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the next game) on condition that the stop operation is performed in the pressing order. In this case, a penalty may not be imposed even if the left reel 2L does not stop for the first time in the game won in the push order bell.

  Also, the pushing effect of the above-described embodiment is not limited to the case where the result is determined first and the outcome corresponding to the result is stopped, similarly to the pushing order effect. For example, when it is determined that the directing effect is to be executed, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated while the three winning “red 7” s are aligned, and the winning eye is “red” to the player. 7 ”is recognized, and if the red“ 7 ”set is stopped by the player's pressing operation, benefits such as navigation stock and AT lottery will be granted. It may be suggested to output a sound such as “Great!” In addition, when the outlier is stopped without stopping the three red “7” lines by the player's eye-pressing operation, a voice such as “Sorry!” Is output.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 30 to 32, the above-described push order effects, eye-push effects, and two-stage effects are repeated as long as the three “red 7” are produced. Although it has been described that when the start point is stopped, these reel effects are ended and the normal reel rotation control is resumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the push order effect, the eye-push effect, and the two-stage effect are repeatedly executed until the “red 7” triple set is stopped once, and the “red 7” triple set is stopped. The reel production may be terminated.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the push order effect, the eye-push effect, and the two-stage effect are being executed, the reel effect is repeatedly executed as long as the “red 7” set is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is terminated by executing the reel effect once, regardless of whether the triple of “Red 7” is stopped or the starting point is stopped. Thus, the process may be shifted to normal reel control.

  For the cherry effect in the above-described embodiment, when “single cherry” → “double cherries” is derived or when “double cherries” → “triple cherries” is derived, all reels 2L Although the example which rotates -2R was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. Regarding the derivation of “single cherry” → “double cherry”, the right reel 2R and the left reel 2L on which the “cherry symbol” is stopped are stopped (without re-rotating) and adjacent to the left reel 2R. Only the middle reel 2C may be rotated. Then, by stopping the middle reel 2C at the “cherry symbol”, the “double cherry” is derived. Similarly, for derivation of “double cherries” → “triple cherries”, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on which the “cherry symbol” is stopped are stopped (without rotating), and the right reel Only 2R may be rotated. Then, by stopping the right reel 2R at the “cherry symbol”, the “triple cherry” is derived.

  In addition, when the cherry effect is being executed during the freeze and the cherry 2 is not won before the occurrence of the freeze, the single cherry is stopped by the control based on the pre-result control data as the cherry effect (same as the cherry 2 winning) An example in which benefits such as an AT lottery is not given is described. However, in the cherry effect during freezing, a predetermined privilege may be given by, for example, performing an AT lottery (for example, the same mode as when a weak cherry is won) by stopping a single cherry. In this case, the privilege granted when the single cherry is stopped may be the same regardless of whether or not it is frozen (for example, the probability of winning an AT in the AT lottery is set to be the same). Or may be different depending on whether or not it is frozen (for example, the probability of winning an AT in the AT lottery is higher when it is frozen than when it is normal) Set to).

  In addition, during the cherry production during the freeze, an example was explained in which a single cherry was promoted to a double cherry, and a double cherry was promoted to a triple cherry. (You may be promoted without going through two cherries). Thereby, the variation of a cherry effect can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, the example in which the reel effect determined when the freeze is won is repeatedly executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reel effect is repeatedly executed, the type of the next reel effect is determined each time. May be.

  In addition, when any one of the push order effect, the eye-push effect, and the two-stage effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the first result lottery or the second and subsequent result lottery In the above example, the ratio determined to the “777” stop pattern is changed. However, the example of changing the ratio determined to the “777” stop pattern is not limited to this, and for example, “777” depending on the occurrence of freeze (bonus winning, cherry winning, push-bell winning, etc.) The ratio determined for the stop pattern may be varied. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to a freeze generation | occurrence | production opportunity can be improved, and the interest of a game can be improved.

[About the appearance frequency of cherries]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the appearance frequency of the cherry is determined based on the appearance rate, the number of digested games from the previous appearance, and the like has been described. However, when determining the appearance frequency of cherries, the cherry appearance frequency may be specified in consideration of the rate of winning a cherry while a predetermined time elapses, the number of times a cherry is won before the predetermined time elapses, and the like.

  In addition, although an example has been described in which the cherry can be stopped regardless of whether or not it is during the freeze period, the cherry is not limited to this, and may be stopped only during the freeze period. In this case, the main control unit 41 specifies the appearance frequency of cherries during freezing. Specifically, the frequency at which the cherry effect is executed as the reel effect during the freeze may be specified.

[Freeze timing]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the freeze is generated when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game has been described. However, the timing for generating the freeze is not limited to this, and when the game is over, Any timing such as when one stop operation is performed may be used.

[Relationship between wait time and freeze]
In the above-described embodiment, the wait time and the freeze are exemplified as the period for delaying the progress of the game. The example in which the reel effect is executed and the benefit is given when the freeze is controlled has been described, but this is continued for a period longer than the wait time, and as a result, the reel effect. This is due to the fact that it can be executed over a long period of time. It is possible to win the freeze during the wait time. In this case, the reel effect may be started during the wait time by including the wait time in the freeze.

[Reel production during delay control]
The reel production control is performed during the period in which the freeze is generated, and the state in which the fluctuation is stopped or the identification information (symbol) is moved at a speed different from the specified speed (as described above, the predetermined output is not stopped). The following control may be performed before and after the specific state (also referred to as a stopped state), which is one of the following states: a state in which the reels are synchronized and rotated slowly so that they are aligned on a straight line. . Note that the configuration of the slot machine in the following example includes the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment, and therefore, differences will be mainly described in the following example.

(I) Example 1
The initial position detection control is performed before the control of the frozen state and the control of the reel effect (hereinafter also referred to as reel effect control) in the above-described embodiment is started. The initial position detection control refers to relative rotation at the start of rotation of the three reels by synchronously rotating all three reels in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. It is control which specifies the initial positional relationship which is a typical positional relationship. In the initial position detection control, since the relative positional relationship between the reels can be specified at the reference position of all the reels, the reel effect control is based on the relative positional relationship between the reels specified here. Each reel is controlled. In the initial position detection control, not only the initial positional relationship, which is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, but also the number of steps until the reel reference position is detected, the three reels are counted. The initial position at the start of rotation is also specified.

  Further, in Example 1, in order to reliably detect the reference positions of all the reels, control is performed to rotate the three reels stopped by the initial position detection control in one synchronous rotation. If the reference position cannot be detected even with one reel, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the reel and error control is performed.

  Next, after the initial position detection control, the main CPU 41a proceeds to reel effect control while maintaining the rotation state in the initial position detection control. In the reel effect control, while maintaining the rotation of the reels, the corresponding symbols (for example, “red 7” in a triple, triple cherry, double cherry) are aligned relative to each other so that they are aligned. Control the positional relationship.

  Next, after the reel effect control in the above-described embodiment (for example, when YES is determined in Sf5 or Sf14 in FIG. 28; the same applies hereinafter), the main CPU 41a performs the initial position return control. In the initial position return control, while maintaining the rotation of the reels, the relative positions of the reels are set so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship of the reels at the start of the reel rotation specified in the initial position detection control. The general positional relationship.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control after the initial position return control. In the initial position notification control, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily stopped, the player is informed that it has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the rotation speed of the reel, and validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a changes the visibility of the reel by performing the lighting LED on / off control in accordance with the initial position detection control, the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control in the freeze period. To control. The turning on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the initial position detection control, the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control is based on the relative position of each reel at the start of reel rotation based on the reel effect command described above. The initial positional relationship, which is a relationship, is specified, the display position of each reel is specified from the specified initial positional relationship, and the process is performed according to the specified display position.

  According to such a configuration, after the game is started, the relative positional relationship between the three reels in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is delayed is a specific positional relationship (“ Since the reel effect control is performed so that the red 7 "is aligned in a straight line), it is possible to perform an effect with an impact in the reel variation mode during the freeze period.

  In Example 1, as the special derivation control for performing the derivation control of the plurality of variable display areas so that the relative positional relationship of the identification information between the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific positional relation, Reel effect control is applied to rotate the reels synchronously so that combinations of the same symbols are aligned on the reel. For example, reel effect that is displayed while moving up and down with "Red 7" lined up. Control, control to stop the state where "red 7" is aligned at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3, and when the state where "red 7" is aligned passes through the position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 without stopping You may apply the control which makes it rotate at a speed slower than the symbol of pass. The same applies to Examples 2 to 9 described below.

  Further, as described above, after performing the reel effect control in which the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”, the reels are maintained in the positional relationship as they are. If the player's stop operation is enabled, if the player operates the top switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an appropriate and continuous manner, the timing at which the stop operation is first performed by chance will be within the “red 7” pull-in range. For example, the timing of the stop operation of the other reels is also likely to be the “red 7” pull-in range, and the reel positional control is not performed, that is, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is the specific positional relationship. If this is not the case, the possibility that “red 7-red 7-red 7” will be aligned will increase compared to the case where the player appropriately operates the top switches 8L, 8C, 8R continuously. It becomes. In this way, by performing the reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the relative positional relationship between the reels and the reel stop operation, thereby changing the degree of technical intervention of the reel stop operation. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in Example 1, when the reel effect control is performed without holding the stop position of each reel in the previous game in the work area of the RAM 41c, the reel effect control is performed after the game is started. Before starting, the initial positional relationship, which is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, is specified by synchronously rotating all the reels in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. In addition to performing the initial position detection control and after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship of the three reels is changed to the initial positional relationship, that is, the reel rotation. When the reel effect control is performed so that “red 7” is aligned on a straight line so that the relative positional relationship at the start is restored. Even if such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the reels are stopped by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The difficulty of operation does not change. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the same positional relationship as when the reels were stopped in the previous game, that is, the positional relationship with no regularity. Even if the reel production control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the slot machine that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control The gameplay will not be compromised.

  In Example 1, after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, not only the relative positional relationship of the three reels is returned to the initial positional relationship but also the initial positional relationship. After returning to the positional relationship, the control indicating that the initial positional relationship has been returned, that is, the reels are rotated after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of reel rotation. Each reel is temporarily stopped at the stop position where each reel was stopped at the start, and control is performed to notify the player that the reel has returned to the initial position. It is possible to notify the player that the symbol has returned to the initial positional relationship, rather than the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned on the reel production control, and the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned. There a misconception to stop switch 8L, 8C, that reel stop operation will be performed by 8R can be prevented.

  In Example 1, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily informed to the player that the player has returned to the initial position, but it may be configured to notify the player that at least the operator has returned to the initial position. A configuration that informs the player that the position has returned to the initial position by synchronously rotating more than one rotation more slowly than usual while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of reel rotation. The corresponding stop when the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation passes after synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of rotation. By irradiating the areas corresponding to match the passage of location in the reel LED 55, even such configuration that notifies the player to the effect that has returned to the initial position, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

  Further, in Example 1, when the reel effect control is performed, after the game starts, first, the three reels that are stopped are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. By performing initial position detection control for specifying an initial positional relationship that is a relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, the initial relationship before the positional relationship between the reels is changed by the reel effect control. The positional relationship is specified, and after the reel effect control is finished, the positional relationship at the start of the reel rotation can be surely restored before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Thus, for example, when the reels step out in the previous game, or when the position of the reels is manually moved on the game site side, the position of each reel specified by the main CPU 41a when the reels were stopped in the previous game. Even if the actual position of each reel is different, after the reel effect control is finished, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the positional relationship at the start of reel rotation is restored. It becomes possible.

  In Example 1, since the initial position detection control is performed and the initial position relationship is specified when the reel effect control is performed, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are held. Therefore, it is possible to save a necessary area as a work area of the RAM 41c.

  In Example 1, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are not held, but the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are held. With such a configuration, for example, the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game is compared with the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, and these are compared. If they do not match, it is possible to detect that the reel is out of step. Then, as a result of comparing the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, when an inconsistency is determined, control is performed to an error state. Thus, it is possible to easily specify that a problem such as step-out has occurred. In addition, when the positional relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game is compared with the initial positional relationship specified by the initial position detection control, if an inconsistency is determined, the error state is always controlled. For example, it may be possible to control to an error state only when a mismatch is continuously determined or when a mismatch is determined at a certain rate or more. Even if the key is tuned up, it does not occur frequently, but it is controlled to an error state, and the game can be prevented from being interrupted.

  As described above, the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position relationship at that time are maintained, and the position relationship specified from the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the initial position detection control are used. When the initial position relationship is compared, at least the initial position detection control identifies the initial position relationship, and the stop position of each reel in the previous game and the stop position at that time until the initial position relationship is compared. Any configuration may be used as long as the relationship is maintained, and thereafter, the configuration may not be maintained, or the configuration may be maintained until the game ends. Further, when it is determined that the initial position detection control (reel effect control) is not performed, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game and its positional relationship may not be maintained after that time. Further, in the configuration for determining whether or not the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the previous game as in Example 1, the game is performed only when it is determined that the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the next game. The stop position of each reel at the time of completion and the positional relationship may be held at least until the initial position detection control identifies the initial positional relationship and compares it with the initial positional relationship.

  In addition, while performing the reel effect control during the freeze period, the effect of changing the visibility of the reel by performing the lighting / extinguishing control of the reel LED 55 is performed, and the effect of changing the reel due to the reel effect control is achieved. In addition, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the initial position relationship has been returned in the initial position notification control after the reel effect control.

  In addition, the effect of changing the visibility of the reel by turning on / off the reel LED 55 is performed only in the freeze period, that is, the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, and the stop switch 8L, After the reel stop operation by 8C and 8R becomes effective, until all the reels stop, the reel LEDs 55 corresponding to all the regions are kept lit, and the visibility of the reels does not change. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the visibility of the reel without changing the difficulty level of the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

(Ii) Example 2
In Example 1, before performing the reel effect control, the three reels of the three reels are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. In contrast to the initial position detection control that specifies the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation, in Example 2, the initial position detection control is not performed, and each reel at the end of the previous game is not performed. The stop position is held until the end of the next game, and the initial positional relationship is specified from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game.

  In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after starting the game when controlling to the freeze state.

  Next, after the reel effect control, the main CPU 41a performs initial position return control as shown in FIG. In the initial position return control, the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game while maintaining the rotation of the reels. To do. In Example 2, as described above, the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game is held until the end of the next game. From the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game, The initial positional relationship can be specified.

  Next, after the initial position return control, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control as shown in FIG. In the initial position notification control, after the synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game, the stop that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game Each reel is temporarily stopped at the position, the player is notified that the reel has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the reel rotation speed and, as shown in FIG. 42, activates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant. .

  Further, in Example 2, the sub CPU 91a performs control to change the visibility of the reel by performing turning on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control in the freeze period. To do. The reel LED 55 on / off control in accordance with the reel effect control, the initial position return control, and the initial position notification control is performed by specifying the display position of each reel when the reel is stopped from the reel stop command described above. It is performed according to the position.

  During the reel production control, the reel LED 55 is turned off sequentially from the area corresponding to the upper design in accordance with the rotation of the reel, and the symbols that can be aligned by the reel production control, that is, “red 7” is passed. Then, the reel LED 55 in the area through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other areas are turned off, and the symbols corresponding to the control pattern are arranged in a straight line, and then arranged in the straight line. In accordance with the passage of the symbol, control is performed so that the reel LED 55 in the region through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other regions are turned off. For example, if “red 7” is aligned on a straight line, the region through which “red 7” passes is turned on in accordance with the passage of “red 7”, and the other regions are turned off. The visibility of the reels is changed so as to emphasize the aligned symbols.

  Next, during the initial position return control, after the reel LEDs 55 in all the areas are once turned off, when the relative positional relationship between the reels returns to the initial positional relationship, each reel is set at the end of the previous game. Control is performed so that the reel LED 55 is turned on in accordance with the passage of three consecutive symbols serving as the stopped positions, and the other areas are turned off.

  Next, in the initial position notification control, the reel LEDs 55 in all the areas are blinked when the stop position stopped on each reel at the end of the previous game is temporarily stopped, and stopped on each reel at the end of the previous game. Emphasize that you have returned to the stop position you were using. Next, when the rotation of the reels starts again, the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are turned on, and then the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, and all the reels stop with the stop operation. Up to this point, the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55 in all regions is maintained.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 2, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game is held until the end of the next game, and when the reel effect control is performed, the stop is performed after the reel effect control. Before the operation of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is determined from the initial positional relationship, that is, from the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. Even when the reel effect control is performed so that “red 7” is aligned on a straight line, such a reel effect control is not performed. Even after that, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, it is difficult to stop the reels by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Degree will not be changed. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is returned to the same positional relationship as when the reels were stopped in the previous game, that is, the positional relationship with no regularity. Even if the reel production control is not performed, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the slot machine that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control The gameplay will not be compromised.

  In Example 2, after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, not only the relative positional relationship of the three reels is returned to the initial positional relationship but also the initial positional relationship. After returning to the positional relationship, the control suggesting that the initial positional relationship has been returned, that is, the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game, the synchronous rotation, and the previous game Each reel is temporarily stopped at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end, and control is performed to notify the player that the reel has returned to the initial position. It is possible to notify the player that the symbol has returned to the initial positional relationship, rather than the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned on the reel production control, and the positional relationship in which some symbols are aligned. There a misconception to stop switch 8L, 8C, that reel stop operation will be performed by 8R can be prevented.

  In Example 2, each reel is stopped at the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative position relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game. Is temporarily informed to the player that the player has returned to the initial position, but it may be configured to notify the player that at least the operator has returned to the initial position. A configuration in which the player is informed of the return to the initial position by performing synchronous rotation more slowly than usual while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the previous game. After the synchronous rotation with the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game, when the stop position stopped at each reel at the end of the previous game passes, the corresponding stop By irradiating the areas corresponding to match the passage of location in the reel LED 55, even such configuration that notifies the player to the effect that has returned to the initial position, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

  Further, in Example 2, by holding the stop position of each reel at the end of the game until the end of the next game, it becomes possible to specify the stop position of each reel at the end of the previous game. From the reel stop position, the initial positional relationship before the positional relationship between the reels is changed by the reel effect control is specified. After the game starts, the positional relationship between the reels at that time is detected. The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing the control, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  In Example 2, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game is held until the end of the next game. However, at least after the end of the reel effect control, it is held until the initial position return control is performed. What is necessary is just to have a structure which is not hold | maintained after that. Further, when it is determined that the reel effect control is not performed, the stop position of each reel at the end of the game may not be held after that time. Further, in the configuration for determining whether or not the reel effect control (freeze state) is performed in the previous game as in Example 2, only when it is determined that the reel effect control is performed in the next game, Any configuration may be used as long as the reel stop position is held at least after the end of the reel effect control until the initial position return control is performed.

(Iii) Example 3
In Example 1, the main CPU 41a is configured to perform the initial position return control after the reel effect control, whereas in Example 3, not the initial position return control but the relative effect of each reel after the reel effect control. The positional relationship change control is performed to change these positional relationships so that the general positional relationship becomes random. Therefore, in Example 3, it is not necessary to specify the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship at the start of rotation of the three reels, and the initial position detection control is performed before the reel effect control is performed as in Example 1. This is not performed, and the stop position of each reel is not held until the end of the next game as in Example 2.

  In Example 3, as shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after the start of the game when controlling the freeze state. In addition, when the freeze lottery is won, at the same time, that is, before the reel production control is started, the position changed by the positional relationship change control after the reel production control is ended is random. A positional relationship determination process for determining the relationship is performed.

  In the positional relationship determination process, a change amount determination lottery is performed in which the change amount for the current position is randomly determined in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in the change amount determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Specifically, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the left reel, and random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 997 are used in the lottery for determining the change amount of the middle reel. In the lottery used to determine the amount of change of the right reel, a random number updated in the range of 0 to 998 is used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45, in the change amount determination lottery, 0 to 4 symbols are won in almost equal proportions as the change amount in any reel. Since the cycle is not synchronized, it is difficult to determine the same change amount as the change amount of each reel.

  Further, the least common multiple that 997, 998, and 999, which are the total number of random numbers, is synchronized is 994010994. In Example 3, each random number is updated for each timer interrupt process (main), and the interval between them is updated. Is 0.56 ms and is updated about 1786 times per second, so the next three random numbers will be synchronized after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually 13 Since it is about time, the same random number combination is not extracted during the day and the change amount determination lottery is not performed, but each time the reel effect control is performed, the same change amount combination as the combination of change amounts of each reel Is difficult to determine.

  Then, the main CPU 41a determines the relative positional relationship between these three reels by performing each change amount determination lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control, and then performs positional relationship change control for changing the relative positional relationship of each reel based on the result of the change amount determination lottery as shown in FIG. In the positional relationship change control, the rotation speed of the left reel is maintained until the positional relationship between the left reel and other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the left reel change amount determination lottery while maintaining the rotation of the reel. Is controlled slower than the other reels, and then returned to the same speed as the other reels. Next, after controlling the rotation speed of the middle reel slower than the other reels until the positional relationship between the middle reel and the other reels is deviated by the number of symbols won in the middle reel change amount determination lottery, Return to the same speed as the rotation speed. Finally, until the positional relationship between the right reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the right reel change amount determination lottery, control the rotation speed of the right reel slower than other reels, Return to the same speed as the reel. Thereby, the positional relationship between the reels becomes a random positional relationship.

  Then, after the main CPU 41a makes the positional relationship between the reels a random positional relationship by the positional relationship change control, the rotational speed of all the reels is accelerated, and as shown in FIG. Then, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated.

  Further, in Example 3, the sub CPU 91a performs control to change the visibility of the reels by performing on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control in the freeze period. The turn-on / off control of the reel LED 55 in accordance with the reel effect control and the positional relationship change control is performed according to the specified display position by specifying the display position of each reel when the reel is stopped from the reel stop command described above. It is supposed to be.

  During the reel production control, the reel LED 55 is sequentially turned off from the area corresponding to the upper symbol in accordance with the rotation of the reel, and the symbols that can be aligned by the reel production control, for example, “Red 7” are passed. Then, the reel LED 55 in the area through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other areas are turned off, and the symbols corresponding to the control pattern are arranged in a straight line, and then arranged in the straight line. In accordance with the passage of the symbol, control is performed so that the reel LED 55 in the region through which the symbol passes is turned on and the other regions are turned off. For example, if “red 7” is aligned on a straight line, the region through which “red 7” passes is turned on in accordance with the passage of “red 7”, and the other regions are turned off. The visibility of the reels is changed so as to emphasize the aligned symbols.

  Next, during the positional relationship change control, the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are once turned off, and then the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions are turned on when the relative positional relationship of each reel becomes a random positional relationship. After that, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated and all the reels are stopped by the stop operation, the lighting state of the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions is maintained. .

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 3, when the reel effect control is performed, the positional relationship is determined so that the relative positional relationship between the reels is random, and after the reel effect control, the stop is stopped. Before the operations of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed to a random positional relationship determined before the reel effect control. Even when the reel effect control is performed so that “red 7” is aligned on a straight line, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are thereafter compared to the case where such reel effect control is not performed. After the operation becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel production control is performed, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed to a random positional relationship, that is, a positional relationship having no regularity. If the control is not performed, there will be no regularity that does not occur, and the game performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control is impaired. There is no end.

  In Example 3, the reel effect control is performed by changing the relative positional relationship between the reels to a random positional relationship after the reel effect control, regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game. Since the game machine of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player is not impaired by performing the game, the positional relationship between the reels at that time is detected after the game is started. The reel effect control can be started immediately without performing the control, that is, without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  Further, in Example 3, the positional relationship determination process for determining the positional relationship so that the positional relationship changed by the positional relationship change control after the end of the reel rendering control is random at the stage before starting the reel rendering control. It is possible to perform freeze lottery, that is, processing for determining whether or not to perform reel effect control and position relationship determination processing can be performed continuously without interposing reel effect control. Can be simplified, and after the reel effect control is finished, it is possible to immediately shift to the positional relationship change control.

  In Example 3, the positional relationship determination process is performed at the stage before the reel effect control is started. However, as shown in FIG. 46, the positional relationship determination process is performed after the reel effect control, and the result is as follows. The configuration may be such that the positional relationship change control is performed based on this, and this configuration holds the data for specifying the relative positional relationship between the reels used in the positional relationship change control over the period of the reel effect control. For example, even when the power is interrupted during the reel effect control period, the amount of data to be held until the power is restored can be reduced.

  In addition, as in Example 3, in the positional relationship determination process, if the change amount determination lottery for determining the change amount for the current position is determined for each reel, the reel change amount determination for changing the relative positional relationship is performed. A configuration in which lottery is performed, and control for changing the positional relationship of the reels immediately (control for shifting the change amount selected in the change amount determination lottery) may be performed sequentially for each reel, and such a configuration is adopted. As a result, it is not necessary to maintain the amount of change for reels other than the reel whose position is changed by the positional relationship change control.

  Further, in Example 3, after the reel effect control, the rotational speed of one reel is set higher than that of the other reels until the positional relationship between the one reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. In this configuration, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by controlling to return to the same speed as the rotation speed of the other reels. One change time is determined from the change time, and the rotation speed of one reel is changed to the other reel until the change time determined in the change amount determination lottery is determined by the positional relationship between one reel and the other reel. It is good also as a structure which changes the relative positional relationship of reels by control returned to the same speed as the rotational speed of another reel, after controlling slower than it.

  In addition, after the reel production control, the acceleration of one reel is started and the other reels are accelerated until the positional relationship between the one reel and the other reels deviates by the number of symbols won in the change amount determination lottery. The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of. Furthermore, the change amount determination lottery determines one change time from a plurality of different change times instead of the number of symbols, starts acceleration of one reel, and the positional relationship between one reel and another reel The relative positional relationship between the reels may be changed by delaying the start of acceleration of the other reels until the change time won in the change amount determination lottery elapses.

  Also, in Example 3, the amount of change with respect to the current position for each reel is randomly determined in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols, respectively, and a change amount determination lottery is performed. The relative positional relationship of these three reels is determined, and the relationship with the positional relationship of each reel becomes more irregular, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. It is possible to make the relative positional relationship between the reels more irregular.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of random numbers is a random number that is relatively prime, the update period between the random numbers is the least common multiple of the total number of random numbers. Thus, the amount of change in each reel can be more varied than in the case where random numbers having the same period are used. As a result, even when the reel effect control is performed so that “red 7” is aligned on a straight line, the position relationship in the reel effect control is enabled when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  In Example 3, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the same change amount is difficult to be determined as the change amount of each reel by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update cycle is used, a random number whose start value is randomly changed every cycle for each random number Even when the same change amount is difficult to be determined as the change amount of each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained by using or changing the timing of performing the lot change determination lot determination for each reel.

  In addition, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the total amount of each random number is a relatively random number, so that the amount of change in each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the variation in the reel, each time the reel effect control is performed, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the same change amount combination is determined as the combination of the change amounts of each reel. Each time the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated, the positional relationship between the reels is prevented from being biased, that is, the positional relationship after reel effect control is not likely to become the same positional relationship. it can.

  Also, in Example 3, it takes a longer time than a general game shop business time to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, and the same player plays a game on the same day. Even when the reel effect control is performed more than once, the positional relationship after the reel effect control does not become the same positional relationship. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the change amount determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, a configuration in which three random numbers are not synchronized more than once during one game, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R each time the reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when the operation is activated, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect control is not likely to be the same positional relationship.

  In Example 3, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, the amount of change for each reel is performed each time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the change amount determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update period is used, the change amount is determined each time the reel effect control is performed. By shifting the timing for performing the determination lottery (for example, when the change amount determination lottery is performed before the reel production control, the change amount determination lottery is performed after the reel production control when the reel production control is performed next time), When the reel change control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same change amount combination as the change amount combination of each reel. Even obtained the same effect as described above.

  In addition, the change amount determination lottery of Example 3 is a configuration in which the change amount for the current position is randomly determined for each reel in the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols corresponding to the pull-in range. The range of the change amount is not limited to the range of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols exemplified above, and a range beyond that may be applied, or a range less than that, for example, 0 to 0 A range allocated to one symbol may be applied. As described above, the range determined when the change time is determined by the change amount determination lottery can be arbitrarily selected as in the case of the number of symbols.

  In Example 3, the relative positional relationship between these three reels after the reel effect control is determined by performing a change amount determination lottery for randomly determining the amount of change with respect to the current position for each reel. The relative positional relationship of these three reels after reel production control is determined by performing a lottery that randomly determines the positional relationship of any other reel with respect to any one reel for each remaining reel. May be determined.

  In addition, a positional relationship determination lottery is performed in which any positional relationship is randomly selected from the relative positional relationships between a plurality of reels that are set differently in advance, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the reel effect control. It is good also as a structure determined as a relative positional relationship of three reels. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the relative position for each symbol unit of the middle reel when the left reel is the reference, and the relative position for each symbol unit of the right reel when the left reel and the middle reel are the reference What is necessary is just to determine any one positional relationship from these positional relationships by the positional relationship determination lottery. In this way, a positional relationship determination lottery that randomly selects one of the positional relationships from the relative positional relationship between the reels that are determined in advance so as to be different is performed, and the selected positional relationship is determined after the reel effect control. By determining the relative positional relationship between these three reels, after the reel effect control, the positional relationship between the reels when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated is biased. Can be prevented.

(Iv) Example 4
In the above-described example 1, the reel effect control is configured to perform the control to rotate the reels synchronously so that the combination of the same symbols is aligned on the three rotating reels. As a control, the reels are synchronized so that the combination of the same symbols (for example, “red 7” in a triple, triple cherries, and double cherries) are aligned in a straight line, and the same symbols are combined. Is controlled to move each reel so that it swells up and down over a predetermined time within the range displayed in the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control after performing initial position detection control in the same manner as in Example 1. In reel production control, while maintaining the rotation of the reels, the relative positional relationship between the reels is controlled so that the corresponding symbols are aligned, and after the corresponding symbols are aligned, these When the symbol moves to the area corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3, the control of moving each reel so as to wave up and down within the range displayed in the fluoroscopic window 3 is performed for a predetermined time.

  Next, after the reel effect control, the main CPU 41a performs the initial position return control as in the first example. In the initial position return control, while rotating the reels, the relative positions of the reels are set so that the initial positional relationship is the relative positional relationship of the reels at the start of the reel rotation specified in the initial position detection control. Control the positional relationship.

  Next, as in Example 1, the main CPU 41a performs initial position notification control after the initial position return control. In the initial position notification control, the reels are rotated at the stop positions where the reels were stopped at the start of the reel rotation after the synchronous rotation while maintaining the initial positional relationship that is the relative positional relationship between the reels at the start of the reel rotation. Is temporarily stopped, the player is informed that it has returned to the initial position, and then the reel starts to rotate again while maintaining the initial positional relationship.

  Then, after the initial position notification control, the main CPU 41a accelerates the rotation speed of the reel, and validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the rotation speed is constant.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 4, for example, “red 7” symbols are arranged in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is delayed after the game is started. Thus, since the reel effect control is performed to display these symbols while moving up and down over a predetermined time, it is possible to perform an effect with an impact in the reel variation mode during the freeze period.

  In addition, when reel effect control is performed to display a specific symbol in the display area for a predetermined time as described above, the symbol that the player desires to draw after starting the rotation from the state where the specific symbol is displayed By knowing the timing up to the pull-in range, it is possible to perform a stop operation within the pull-in range of the symbol desired by the player without timing from the reel fluctuation mode, and no reel effect control is performed. In this case, that is, when the reel starts rotating in a state where a specific symbol is not displayed in the display area, an operation aiming at the symbol desired by the player becomes easier. In this way, by performing reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the start of rotation of the reel from the state in which the specific symbol is displayed and the stop operation of the reel, so that the reel stop operation is performed. The degree of technical intervention may change.

  On the other hand, in Example 4, initial position detection control for specifying the initial position at the start of rotation of the three reels is performed, and after the reel effect control, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated. In addition, each reel is returned to the initial position where it was stopped at the start of reel rotation. For example, when reel effect control is performed to display a state where “red 7” is arranged for a predetermined time. However, even if such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the reel stop operation by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. The difficulty level of will never change. That is, even when the reel effect control is performed, the stop position of each reel is returned to the same stop position as when the reel was stopped in the previous game, that is, the stop position without regularity. If the reel production control is not performed, a certain regularity that does not occur is not born, and the slot machine has the gaming property that the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. It will not be damaged.

  In Example 4, as special derivation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area, for example, reel effect control in which “red 7” is displayed while moving up and down for a predetermined time, that is, for a predetermined time. Control is applied to display a specific symbol while moving it within the display area. For example, the specific symbol is stopped at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 for a predetermined time, or the specific symbol is not stopped. When passing through a position corresponding to the see-through window 3, control may be applied to rotate at a slower speed than other symbols pass through.

  In Example 4, before the reel effect control, the three reels that are stopped are synchronously rotated in the same direction until at least the reference positions of all the reels are detected. Initial position detection control for specifying an initial position at the start of reel rotation is performed. Based on the initial position specified based on the initial position detection control, after the reel effect control, operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R The control to return each reel to the initial position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation was made before the activation of the reel. Hold the stop position of each reel at the end of the next game until the end of the next game, and stop after reel effect control based on the hold position of each reel held Switch 8L, 8C, before the operation of the 8R is enabled, it may be configured to perform control to return the reels to the initial position that has been stopped in the reels at the start reel rotation.

  Further, in Example 4, the configuration includes a plurality of reels. However, in the configuration including only one reel, even when the reel effect control is performed in which a specific symbol is displayed for a predetermined period, the stop is performed thereafter. Even when reel production control is performed by adopting a configuration in which each reel is controlled to return to the stop position that was stopped at each reel at the start of reel rotation before the switch operation is validated, Even if the reel effect control is not performed, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, the difficulty of the reel stop operation does not change, and the player performs the reel effect control by performing the reel effect control. The playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired.

(V) Example 5
In the example 3, the reel effect control is configured to perform the control of rotating the reels in synchronization so that the combination of the same symbols is aligned on the three rotating reels, but the example 5 is the same as in the example 4. In addition, as reel production control, the reels are synchronized so that the same combination of symbols (for example, “red 7”, three cherries, two cherries, two cherries) are aligned in a straight line in the three rotating reels. In the range where the combination of symbols is displayed in the see-through window 3, the reels are controlled to move up and down over a predetermined time.

  In Example 5, as shown in FIG. 48, the main CPU 41a starts reel effect control immediately after the start of the game when controlling to the freeze state. In addition, when winning the freeze lottery, the acceleration time required for the acceleration control until the constant speed rotation is completed for each reel at the same time, that is, before the reel effect control is started, after the reel effect control is finished. Acceleration time determination processing is performed at random.

  In the acceleration time determination process, an acceleration time determination lottery is performed in which the acceleration time of each reel is randomly determined in the range of T (shortest acceleration time) +0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms. In Example 5, it takes about 38 ms for the reel to move one symbol during constant speed rotation where the stop operation is effective, so that one of these acceleration times is selected, resulting in constant speed rotation. At the time, a shift of 4 symbols at maximum occurs.

  In the acceleration time determination lottery, a lottery is performed using random numbers having different total update ranges for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. Specifically, as in the change amount determination lottery, random numbers that are updated in the range of 0 to 996 are used in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the left reel, and 0 to 997 in the lottery that determines the acceleration time of the middle reel. In the lottery for determining the acceleration time of the right reel, random numbers updated in the range of 0 to 998 are used.

  Both of these random numbers are soft random numbers that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. However, since the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, random numbers are used. The update cycle between each other is difficult to synchronize.

  On the other hand, as with the change amount determination lottery, in the acceleration time determination lottery, T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms are won in almost equal proportions for all reels. Thus, since the update cycle of random numbers is not synchronized, the same acceleration time is difficult to be determined as the acceleration time of each reel.

  Similarly to the change amount determination lottery, the next three random numbers will synchronize after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually around 13 hours. The same random number combination is not extracted and the change amount determination lottery is not performed, and each time the reel effect control is performed, it is difficult to determine the same acceleration time combination as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel.

  The main CPU 41a determines the acceleration times of these three reels by performing respective acceleration time determination lotteries.

  Next, the main CPU 41a performs reel effect control, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48, performs acceleration control for accelerating each reel to constant speed rotation based on the result of the acceleration time determination lottery. In the acceleration control, after starting the acceleration of each reel, control is performed to accelerate each reel so as to reach a constant speed rotation in an acceleration time determined for each reel.

  Thereby, the timing which reaches | attains constant speed rotation between each reel becomes random, and also the positional relationship of each reel arranged in reel effect control also becomes a random positional relationship.

  The main CPU 41a validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed by the acceleration control.

  As described above, in the slot machine of Example 5, after the game is started, in the freeze period in which the activation of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is delayed, for example, “red 7” symbols are arranged side by side. Since the reel effect control for displaying these symbols while moving up and down for a predetermined time is performed, an effect with an impact can be performed in the manner of reel change during the freeze period.

  In Example 5, when these symbols are displayed in a state where the symbols of “Red 7” are arranged by reel effect control, the acceleration time until the constant speed rotation is changed at random thereafter. When it is difficult to predict the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in due to the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration, when reel effect control is performed to display the state where "red 7" is arranged for a predetermined time However, compared with the case where such reel effect control is not performed, after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective after that, the stop operation of the reels by these stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. The difficulty is never extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  In Example 5, as special derivation control for displaying specific identification information in the variable display area, reel effect control in which “red 7” is displayed while moving up and down for a predetermined time, that is, specified for a predetermined time. Is applied to control the display to be displayed while being moved within the display area. For example, the control to stop the specific design at a position corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 for a predetermined time, or the specific design to be stopped is not performed. When passing through a position corresponding to the see-through window 3, a control of rotating at a slower speed than passing through other symbols may be applied.

  Also, in Example 5, when these symbols are displayed with the “red 7” symbols lined up by reel effect control, the acceleration time until constant rotation thereafter is randomly changed for each reel. In addition to the timing to reach constant speed rotation, the positional relationship between the reels arranged in the reel effect control is also a random positional relationship, but one acceleration time determined at random May be applied as the acceleration time for all reels, and even with such a configuration, it is difficult to predict the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in, based on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration. Therefore, even when the reel effect control is performed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8 are thereafter compared with the case where the reel effect control is not performed. After the operation is enabled, there is no such thing as difficulty reel stop operation is extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Further, in Example 5, the configuration includes a plurality of reels. However, in the configuration including only one reel, even when reel effect control is performed in which a specific symbol is displayed for a predetermined period, The acceleration time until starting constant speed rotation is changed at random, and the timing at which symbols exceeding the pull-in range can be pulled in is predicted based on the elapsed time from the start of reel acceleration. Therefore, even when the reel effect control is performed, it is more difficult to stop the reel after the stop switch operation becomes effective than when the reel effect control is not performed. The degree does not become extremely low. In other words, even when reel effect control is performed, the reel effect control is performed by changing the acceleration time from the start of the reel acceleration to the constant speed rotation at random, that is, the acceleration time without regularity. However, there is no regularity that does not occur if the reel production control is not performed, and the gaming performance of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by the technical intervention by the player by performing the reel production control. Will not be damaged.

  Further, in Example 5, regardless of the positional relationship between the reels at the end of the game, after the reel effect control, the player performs the reel effect control by randomly changing the acceleration time of each reel. Since it is a configuration in which the playability of the slot machine in which the display result is derived by technical intervention is not impaired, after the start of the game, without performing control to detect the positional relationship between each reel, that is, The reel effect control can be started immediately without waiting for the reference positions to be detected in all the reels.

  Further, in Example 5, the acceleration time determination process for randomly determining the acceleration time applied to the acceleration control after the end of the reel effect control is performed at the stage before the reel effect control is started. That is, the process for determining whether or not to perform the reel effect control and the acceleration time determining process can be performed continuously without interposing the reel effect control, and the flow of the process can be simplified and the reel Immediately after the effect control is finished, the control can be shifted to the acceleration control.

  In Example 5, the acceleration time determination process is performed before the reel effect control is started. However, the acceleration time determination process is performed after the reel effect control, and the acceleration control is performed based on the result. However, with such a configuration, it is not necessary to hold data for specifying the acceleration time of each reel used in the acceleration control over the reel production control period. For example, during the reel production control period Even when the power is interrupted, the amount of data held until the power is restored can be reduced.

  Further, in Example 5, the change amount determination lottery for randomly determining the acceleration time of each reel is performed for each reel so that the acceleration time of each of these three reels after the reel effect control is determined. Thus, the relationship with the acceleration time of each reel becomes more irregular, and the time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation can be made more irregular.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, since the total number of each random number uses a random number, the update period of each random number is the least common multiple of the total number of each random number. As compared with the case where random numbers having the same period are used, the acceleration time in each reel can be more varied.

  In Example 5, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the same acceleration time as the acceleration time of each reel is difficult to be determined by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. However, for example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, even if random numbers having the same update period are used, random numbers whose start values are randomly changed for each period for each random number Even if the same acceleration time is not easily determined as the acceleration time of each reel by using or shifting the timing for performing the lottery determination for each reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the total number of random numbers is a relatively random number, so that the acceleration time for each reel is larger than when random numbers with the same period are used. In addition to the fact that each reel effect control is performed, the rate at which the same acceleration time combination is determined as the combination of the acceleration times of each reel can be reduced, so that the reel effect control is performed. Every time the reel effect control is performed, the acceleration time from the start of acceleration to the constant speed rotation is biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination. Can be prevented.

  Further, in Example 5, it takes a longer time than a general game shop business time to synchronize the next three random numbers after synchronizing once, and the same player plays a game on the same day. Even when the reel effect control is performed more than once, the combination of the acceleration times after the reel effect control is not the same combination. In addition, when performing the reel effect control, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed, it is a rare phenomenon that the combination of the same random numbers in the previous time is extracted. If it takes more than one game, that is, if three random numbers are not synchronized twice or more during one game, acceleration is performed after reel effect control every time reel effect control is performed. It is possible to prevent the acceleration time from the start to the constant speed rotation from being biased, that is, the combination of the acceleration times for each reel after the reel effect control is likely to be the same combination.

  In Example 5, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, the acceleration time of each reel is controlled every time the reel effect control is performed by using random numbers in which the total number of random numbers is relatively prime. For example, in the acceleration time determination lottery performed for each reel, even if a random number having the same update period is used, the acceleration time is performed every time the reel effect control is performed. By shifting the timing for performing the determination lottery (for example, when the acceleration time determination lottery is performed before the reel production control, the acceleration time determination lottery is performed after the reel production control when the next reel production control is performed), Each time the reel effect control is performed, the same combination of acceleration times is determined as the combination of acceleration times of each reel. Even when the have configured obtained the same effect as described above.

  In addition, in the acceleration time determination lottery of Example 5, the acceleration time for each reel is in the range of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms, which causes a shift of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 symbols corresponding to the pull-in range. Although it is a configuration determined at random, the range of acceleration time is not limited to the range of T + 0 ms, T + 38 ms, T + 76 ms, T + 114 ms, and T + 152 ms exemplified above, and more ranges may be applied, A lesser range, eg, a range assigned for 0-38 ms, may be applied.

  Further, in Example 5, the acceleration time determination lottery for randomly determining the acceleration time for each reel is performed, whereby the acceleration time of these three reels after the reel effect control is determined. The acceleration time of these three reels after the reel effect control may be determined by performing a lottery that randomly determines the difference of the acceleration time of the other reel with respect to the acceleration time of one reel.

  In addition, an acceleration time combination determination lottery in which any combination is randomly selected from a plurality of combinations of acceleration times determined in advance so as to be different is performed, and after reel effect control based on the selected combination of acceleration times Such a configuration may be adopted in which acceleration control of these three reels is performed, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a bias from occurring in the acceleration time for each of the plurality of reels after the reel effect control.

(Vi) Example 6
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed by the main control unit 41 after the end of the reel effect control accompanying the control to the freeze state. The reel effect control in Example 6 is, for example, that the reels are arranged so that the same combination of symbols (for example, three “red 7”, three cherries, two cherries) are aligned on the three rotating reels. Control that rotates in synchronization (including control to move each reel up and down over a predetermined time within a range in which the combination of the same symbols is displayed in the see-through window 3). The reel effect control in Examples 7 to 9 shown below is the same as that in Example 6.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S1), and waits until all reels are stopped. In Example 6, all reels are controlled to be stopped after the reel effect control is finished. In S1, it is determined whether or not such a state is controlled. This also applies to the post-reel acceleration processing in Examples 7 to 9 described below.

  After it is determined in step S1 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S2). ). As shown in FIG. 50, the left delay random number (Lr) is a random number for left delay that is incremented and updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 996 (total 997) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The medium delay random number value (Cr) extracted from the counter is added from the random number counter for medium delay in the range of 0 to 997 (total number 998) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The extracted random number for right delay (Rr) is extracted from the random counter for left delay that is incremented and updated one by one in the range of 0 to 998 (total number 999) every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S2, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel A timer value (Ct) and a right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S3).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, the left reel timer value (Lt) is a value obtained by dividing the left delay random number value (Lr) by 21, and the middle reel timer value (Ct) is The middle delay random value (Cr) divided by 21 is a surplus value, and the right reel timer value (Rt) is a surplus value obtained by dividing the right delay random value (Rr) by 21. Both values are 0-20.

  Next, a reel delay command that can specify the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in step S3 is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S4).

  The reel delay command is a command that can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective after the reel effect control executed in the freeze state is performed. is there. More specifically, left, middle, and right reel timer values that can specify the delay time of each reel are stored, and each reel starts to rotate by taking into account the acceleration time of the reel on the sub-control unit 91 side. This is a command that can specify the timing, the timing of constant speed rotation, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid, and is transmitted before starting the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first after the reel effect. In this example, an example in which a reel delay command is output separately from the freeze command will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which each reel starts to rotate before starting the freeze, and constant speed rotation. And a timing at which the stop operation becomes valid, and a freeze command including such information may be output when the freeze is started. It should be noted that the reel delay command is applied in the same manner as in Example 6 in Examples 7 to 9 shown below.

  Accompanying the reception of the reel delay command, the sub-control unit 91 identifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reel. It becomes possible.

  Next, the rotation start of the left reel is set, and after starting the rotation of the left reel (S5), it is determined whether the acceleration of the left reel is completed, that is, whether the left reel is rotated at a constant speed. (S6).

  Here, a method for determining whether or not the reel has been rotated at a constant speed will be described. When the main controller 41 starts rotating the reel, the reel motor is accelerated by switching a plurality of control states with different step widths of the reel motor, and finally the step width control state during constant speed rotation is performed. After reaching, control is performed to maintain this step width. At this time, the main control unit 41 sets a control flag indicating the control state of each stage in the RAM 507, and switches the control state by referring to the control flag. Whether or not the reel has been rotated at a constant speed is determined based on whether or not a control flag indicating a control state of the step width at the time of constant speed rotation is set. If the control flag is set, the reel Is determined to have a constant speed rotation.

  The method for determining whether or not the reel has rotated at a constant speed is not limited to this. For example, the time from when the reference position of the reel is detected until the next reference position is detected is measured. Is configured to determine that the reel has been rotated at a constant speed by matching with the time during constant speed rotation more than the specified number of times, that is, whether the speed of the reel is physically detected and whether or not the constant speed rotation has been determined. It is good also as composition to do.

  After it is determined in step S6 that acceleration of the left reel is completed, a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for left reel set in step S3 by 60 is set in the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S7). ), And waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S8).

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S8, the rotation start of the middle reel is set, and after the rotation of the middle reel is started (S9), whether or not the acceleration of the middle reel is completed, that is, the middle reel is It is determined whether or not the rotation speed is constant (S10).

  Since the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed, ((left reel timer value × 60) × 0.56) The time of ms will be timed. Further, as described above, the timer value for the left reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 6, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move one symbol. , Rotation of the middle reel starts at a timing from 0 to one reel.

  After it is determined in step S10 that the middle reel has been accelerated, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the middle reel timer value set in step S3 by 60 (S11). Wait until the counter value reaches 0 (S12).

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S12, the rotation start of the right reel is set, and after starting the rotation of the right reel (S13), whether or not the acceleration of the right reel is completed, that is, the right reel is It is determined whether or not the rotation speed is constant (S14).

  As described above, the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed. ((Timer value for middle reel × 60 ) /0.56) ms will be timed, the timer value for the middle reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and it takes about 33.6 ms in Example 6 for the reel to move one symbol. Therefore, the rotation of the right reel starts at the timing from 0 to one reel after the completion of the acceleration of the middle reel.

  After determining that the acceleration of the right reel is completed in step S14, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for right reel set in step S3 by 60 (S15), and the delay timer is set. Wait until the counter value reaches 0 (S16).

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S16, the stop operation is set to be enabled. Accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S17), and the post-reel acceleration processing is finished.

  As described above, the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed ((right reel timer value × 60 ) /0.56) ms time is counted, and the timer value for the right reel is in the range of 0 to 20, and it takes about 33.6 ms in Example 6 for the reel to move one symbol. Therefore, the reel stop operation becomes effective at the timing from 0 to one reel rotation after the acceleration of the right reel is completed.

  After the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is completed, the post-reel effect acceleration process is executed, so that the left reel is rotated from the state where all reels are stopped as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range from 0 to the first rotation of the reel has elapsed, the rotation of the middle reel starts. When the middle reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which varies from 0 to one reel rotation, has elapsed, the right reel When the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which fluctuates in a range from the time when rotation starts at a constant speed to the time when the reel makes one revolution, each reel Stop operation is enabled.

  As described above, in Example 6, after the game is started, the relative positional relationship between the three reels in the freeze state in which the activation of the stop operation is delayed is a specific positional relationship, that is, “red 7-red 7-red. Since the reel effect control is performed so that the combination of “7” is aligned in a straight line, an effect with an impact can be performed in the reel variation mode in the frozen state.

  In Example 6, rotation 3 is performed as special derivation control for performing derivation control of the plurality of variable display regions so that the relative positional relationship between the display bands constituting the plurality of variable display regions becomes a specific positional relationship. Reel effect control is applied to stop the reels so that the same symbol combinations are aligned on one reel. However, the present invention is not limited to such effects. It is also possible to apply an effect that simply rotates in a synchronized state. In addition, the combination of the same symbols is not only a straight line, but also a combination of different symbols. It is also possible to apply an effect of stopping display modes that can be suggested (for example, reach eyes, chance eyes, etc.) or synchronously rotating in that state.

  Further, as described above, after performing the reel effect control in which the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a specific positional relationship, for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”, the reels are maintained in the positional relationship as they are. If the player's stop operation is enabled, if the player operates the top switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an appropriate and continuous manner, the timing at which the stop operation is first performed by chance will be within the “red 7” pull-in range. For example, the timing of the stop operation of the other reels is also likely to be the “red 7” pull-in range, and the reel positional control is not performed, that is, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is the specific positional relationship. If this is not the case, the possibility that “red 7-red 7-red 7” will be aligned will increase compared to the case where the player appropriately operates the top switches 8L, 8C, 8R continuously. It becomes. In this way, by performing the reel effect control, a certain regularity is created between the relative positional relationship between the reels and the reel stop operation, thereby changing the degree of technical intervention of the reel stop operation. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in Example 6, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and after that, after one reel starts to rotate, the time until the next reel starts rotating randomly changes. Thus, after the reel effect, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. Even if the reel effect is performed or not, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. . That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 6, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 6, the stop operation becomes effective after the delay time for the right reel has elapsed after the completion of the acceleration of the right reel at which the rotation starts last, but the acceleration of the right reel at which the rotation starts last. Even when the stop operation is validated immediately after completion, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship, and the stop operation may be validated at this point.

  In Example 6, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Further, in Example 6, after the reel effect, the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined at a stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, and the determined reel timer A reel delay command that can specify a value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, the reel delay command fluctuates randomly for all reels at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. If the reel timer value is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. For example, a game start operation At the timing when the game is started, that is, before the game is controlled to be frozen. Even when the reel timer value that fluctuates to the predetermined value is determined, and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the rotation of each reel as described above. Without sending a command to that effect at every start or every acceleration completion, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective. Thus, it is possible to control production and the like in accordance with the specified timing.

  Further, in Example 6, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 6, since the delay time is set until the rotation of the next reel is started after the acceleration of one reel is completed, a counter for measuring the delay time for each reel is provided in the RAM 507. The delay time for each reel can be measured only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all the reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 6, the delay of the time that the reel makes one turn at maximum When setting the time, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 = 1260 of the reel timer value, which is substantially a 2-byte area, is required. Although a 6-byte area is actually required, even if 1 byte is allocated as each of the left, middle, and right reel timer value areas as in Example 6, the common delay timer counter area and In total, an area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 6 is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel.

  In Example 6, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by multiplying the reel timer value by 60, which is the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves, is executed. Every time the interrupt process (main) is executed, the delay timer counter value is decremented by one to count the delay time, so the timer interrupt process (main) is executed for the delay time measurement. It is not necessary to perform different processing for each number of times, and the processing can be made common without providing a branch with respect to the number of times of the timer interrupt processing (main) with respect to the delay time counting.

  The number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is executed / N (N is a natural number, and the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves) The value obtained by multiplying the number of executions by the reel timer value is set in the delay timer counter, and the delay timer counter value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed N times. The delay time counter may be configured so that the delay timer counter does not need to be updated every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the timer that counts the time The load of the interrupt process (main) can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the delay timer counter can be reduced.

  Further, the timer counter value for delay is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed M times (number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves). Therefore, the delay time counter may not be updated every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, and the timer allocation related to the timing is not necessary. The load of the loading process (main) can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the delay timer counter can be further reduced.

  In Example 6, the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, the left delay random value (Lr) for setting the right reel timer value, the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value are set. Since the numerical value (Rr) is extracted using a random number counter for left delay, a random number for middle delay, and a random number counter for right delay, each having a different update range, a random number counter with the same update range for each reel. Compared with the case where it is used, the delay time corresponding to each reel can be more varied. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. Avoid as much as possible.

  Also, as these random number counters, soft random number counters that are updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed are used. Because it is used, it does not synchronize until the update cycle of each random number counter becomes the least common multiple of the total number of update ranges of each random number counter, compared with the case where a random number counter of the same cycle is used, Each time the reel effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when the stop operation is validated, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect is not likely to be the same. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. It can be avoided more reliably.

  Further, the least common multiple that 997, 998, and 999, which are the total number of each random number counter, is synchronized is 994010994. In Example 6, each random number is updated every timer interrupt process (main), Since the interval is 0.56 ms and is updated about 1786 times per second, the next three random numbers will be synchronized after about 154.6 hours after synchronizing once, and the business hours of the amusement store are usually Since it is about 13 hours, the same random number combination is not extracted during the day, and the left, middle and right reel timer values are not calculated.

  That is, it takes a longer time than the general game store business hours to synchronize the values of the next three random number counters once synchronized, and the same player plays a game on the same day at least twice. Even when the reel effect is performed, the positional relationship after the reel effect is not the same. In addition, when setting the left, middle, and right reel timer values for the reel production, it is a rare phenomenon that the same combination of the same random numbers is extracted. If it takes more than one game to synchronize the random numbers, that is, if the three random numbers do not synchronize more than once during one game, the stop operation is effective every time the reel effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels from being biased when being converted, that is, the positional relationship after the reel effect is likely to be the same positional relationship. As a result, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, there is regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is activated. Furthermore, it can avoid reliably.

  In Example 6, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), the right delay random value for setting the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value. A numerical value (Rr) is extracted using a random number counter for left delay, a random number for middle delay, and a random number counter for right delay, each having a different update range, but at least a random number counter having a different update range or update rule is used. In the case of a configuration, as in the case described above, even when a reel effect is performed in a positional relationship in which specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, the positional relationship after the reel effect is regular when the stop operation is activated. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  Hereinafter, an example in which random counter values having different update rules are used as the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this example, the RAM 507 stores the current left reel timer value LT, the previous left reel timer value bLT, the current middle reel timer value CT, the previous middle reel timer value bCT, and the current right reel timer value RT. The previous right reel timer value bRT is assigned. Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the calculation shown in FIG. 52 is performed, and the above values are updated.

  Specifically, first, the LT value is updated by adding 13 (which may be a predetermined prime number) to the bLT value, dividing the added value by 21, and updating the value to the remainder. Next, the value of CT is updated by adding the value of LT to the value of bCT and dividing the value after the addition by 21. Next, the RT value is updated to the value obtained by adding the CT value to the bRT value and dividing the added value by 21.

  The main control unit 41 extracts the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value when performing the post-reel acceleration process, and at the time of delaying these extracted values, respectively. Set to timer counter.

  In this example, the timer value for the left reel, the timer value for the middle reel, and the timer value for the right reel are extracted using random number counters having different update rules, so that the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. Even when the reel effect is performed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of regularity in the positional relationship after the reel effect when the stop operation is validated as much as possible.

  In addition, the value of the random number counter is 0 to 20, and can be used as it is as the timer value for the left reel, the timer value for the middle reel, and the timer value for the right reel, so that the load for calculating or processing the value can be reduced. .

(Vii) Example 7
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 7.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S101), and waits until all reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S101 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S102). ).

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S102, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel A timer value (Ct) and a right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S103).

  Next, a reel delay command that can specify the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in the step of S103 is transmitted as the transmission data of the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S104). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, a value obtained by further adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the timer value for the left reel set in step S103 by 60 is set in the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S105), and the rotation start of the left reel is set. After setting and starting the rotation of the left reel (S106), it waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S107).

  Here, 240, which is added to the value obtained by multiplying the left reel timer value by 60, is a timer interrupt process (until acceleration is completed after the reel starts rotating, that is, until acceleration is completed). In step S107, the process waits until the time that is the sum of the reel acceleration time and the delay time based on the left reel timer value elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S107, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the intermediate reel timer value set in step S103 by 60 (S108). After setting the rotation start of the middle reel and starting the rotation of the middle reel (S109), it waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S110). That is, it waits until the time which combined the acceleration time of a reel and the delay time based on the timer value for middle reels passes.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S110, the delay timer counter is set to a value obtained by adding 240 to the value obtained by multiplying the right reel timer value set in step S103 by 60 (S111), The right reel rotation start is set, and after the right reel starts rotating (S112), the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S113). That is, it waits until the time which combined the acceleration time of a reel and the delay time based on the timer value for right reels passes.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S113, the stop operation is set to be enabled, and accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S114), and the post-reel acceleration processing is finished.

  In Example 7, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state, the above-described post-reel acceleration process is executed, so that all the reels are stopped from the stopped state as shown in FIG. The reel rotation starts and the left reel delay time (left reel timer) fluctuates between the acceleration time from the start of the rotation of the left reel to the rotation of the left reel at a constant speed and the range from 0 to one revolution of the reel. Value × 60 × 0.56 ms), the middle reel starts to rotate, and the acceleration time from when the middle reel starts to the middle reel to constant speed rotation is constant. At the time when the sum of the intermediate reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range from 0 to the time when the reel makes one revolution has elapsed, Start spinning and right Acceleration time from the start of rotation of the right reel to the constant speed rotation of the right reel and right reel delay time varying from the time of the constant speed rotation to 0 to one reel rotation (right reel timer value) The stop operation of each reel becomes effective when the total time of (× 60 × 0.56 ms) has elapsed.

  As described above, in Example 7, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and then the time from the start of rotation of one reel to the start of rotation of the next reel is changed randomly. After the reel production, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the reel production is such that a specific pattern is arranged in a straight line. Even when such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 7, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  In addition, the example 7 is configured such that the stop operation becomes effective after the sum of the acceleration time of the right reel and the delay time with respect to the right reel has elapsed after the rotation of the right reel that has started to rotate last. Even if the stop operation is enabled immediately after the acceleration time of the right reel that starts rotating at the end, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship, so the stop operation is effective at this point. It is good also as a structure to make.

  Further, in Example 7, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Further, in Example 7, after the reel effect, the reel timer value that fluctuates randomly for all the reels is determined at a stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, and the determined reel timer A reel delay command that can specify a value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, the reel delay command fluctuates randomly for all reels at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. If the reel timer value is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. For example, a game start operation At the timing when the game is started, that is, before the game is controlled to be frozen. Even when the reel timer value that fluctuates to the predetermined value is determined, and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the rotation of each reel as described above. Without sending a command to that effect at every start or every acceleration completion, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective. Thus, it is possible to control production and the like in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 7, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 7, since the acceleration time and delay time for the next reel are set after the measurement of the acceleration time and delay time for one reel is completed, the acceleration time and delay time are measured for each reel. There is no need to assign a counter to the RAM 507, and it is possible to measure the acceleration time and delay time for each reel only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 7, the maximum delay time for the reel to make one turn When the time obtained by adding the acceleration time to the time is set, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 + 240 = 1500 of the reel timer value is required, which is substantially a 2-byte area. If each reel is provided, an area of 6 bytes is actually required. However, as shown in Example 7, even if 1 byte is assigned as each of the left, middle and right reel timer value areas, it is common. In other words, the delay timer counter area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 7 is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel.

(Viii) Example 8
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process that is executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 8.

  In the post-reel effect acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (S201), and waits until all the reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S201 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S202). ).

  Next, based on the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) extracted in step S202, the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel The timer value (Ct) and the right reel timer value (Rt) are calculated and set in the RAM 507 (S203).

  Next, a reel delay command capable of specifying the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in step S203 is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S204). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, the delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 is set to a value obtained by multiplying the timer value for the left reel set in step S103 by 60 (S205), and waits until the delay timer counter value becomes zero (S205). S206).

  In step S206, the process waits until a delay time based on the left reel timer value elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in step S206, the left reel rotation start is set, and after the left reel starts rotating (S207), the delay timer counter is set for the intermediate reel set in step S203. A value obtained by multiplying the timer value by 60 is set (S208), and the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S209). That is, it waits until the delay time based on the timer value for the middle reel elapses.

  When the delay counter value becomes 0 in the step of S209, the rotation start of the middle reel is set, and after the rotation of the middle reel is started (S210), the delay timer counter is set for the right reel set in the step of S203. A value obtained by multiplying the timer value by 60 is set (S211), and the process waits until the delay timer counter value becomes 0 (S212). That is, it waits until the delay time based on the timer value for the right reel elapses.

  When the counter value for delay becomes 0 in the step of S212, the rotation start of the right reel is set, the rotation of the right reel is started (S213), and the acceleration of the right reel is continued until the right reel rotates at a constant speed. Is completed (S214), and after the acceleration of the right reel is completed, the stop operation is set to be enabled. Accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is enabled (S215), and the post-reel acceleration processing is performed. finish.

  In the example 8, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is finished, the above-described acceleration process after the reel effect is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms), which fluctuates in the range until the lap, elapses, the left reel starts rotating, and the left reel starts rotating from 0 to 0. When a medium reel delay time (timer value for medium reel × 60 × 0.56 ms) that fluctuates in the range until one full revolution of the reel has elapsed, the rotation of the medium reel starts and the rotation of the medium reel starts. Stop operation of each reel when the right reel rotates at a constant speed after the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 60 × 0.56 ms) elapses in the range from 0 to one reel rotation Becomes effective.

  As described above, in Example 8, after the reel effect, all of the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and after that, after one reel starts to rotate, the time until the next reel starts rotating is changed randomly. After the reel production, before the stop operation is validated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is changed randomly, and the reel production is such that a specific pattern is arranged in a straight line. Even when such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  In addition, the reel delay command that can determine the reel timer value that is randomly determined for each reel at a stage prior to the start of the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and that can determine the determined reel timer value. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 8, after the reel effect, all the reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 8, the delay time is set before the rotation of the left reel that starts rotating first, and the left reel starts rotating after the delay time has elapsed, but the rotation starts first. Even if the delay time is not provided before the rotation of the reel to be rotated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels is a random positional relationship. It is good also as a structure which starts rotation immediately without providing.

  Further, in Example 8, the rotation is started in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the rotation of the reels may be started in another predetermined order, or the reel rotation start order. A configuration in which is changed may be used.

  Also, in Example 8, after the reel effect, the stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first. Specifically, at the stage before the timing of the delay time of the left reel, each reel is randomly selected. The reel timer value that fluctuates is determined, and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, at least before the rotation of the reel that starts rotating first is started. In this stage, if the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined and a reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effects as described above are obtained. For example, the timing at which the game is started and the game is started, that is, the timing before the freeze state is controlled. Even when the reel timer value that randomly varies for all the reels is determined and the reel delay command capable of specifying the determined reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control is performed as described above. The unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which constant reel rotation occurs, and the stop operation. It becomes possible to specify effective timings and to control effects and the like in accordance with the specified timings.

  Further, in Example 8, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 8, since the delay time for the next reel is set after the time measurement of the delay time for one reel is completed, a counter for measuring the delay time for each reel needs to be assigned to the RAM 507. Therefore, it is possible to measure the delay time for each reel only by assigning a common delay timer counter to all the reels. In particular, in the configuration in which the time is counted by subtracting the counter value every time the timer interrupt process (main) executed every 0.56 ms is executed as in Example 8, the maximum delay time for one reel rotation When setting the time, an 11-bit area capable of storing the maximum value (20) × 60 = 1260 of the reel timer value, which is substantially a 2-byte area, is required. Although a 6-byte area is actually required, even if 1 byte is assigned as each of the left, middle, and right reel timer value areas as in Example 8, the common delay timer counter area and In total, an area of 4 bytes is sufficient.

  The example 8 is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a delay timer counter is assigned to each reel may be employed.

(Ix) Example 9
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the control content of the post-reel effect acceleration process executed after the end of the reel effect associated with the main control unit 41 being controlled to be frozen in Example 9.

  In the post-reel acceleration process, first, it is determined whether or not all reels are stopped (S301), and waits until all reels are stopped.

  After it is determined in step S301 that all reels are stopped, the left delay random value (Lr), the middle delay random value (Cr), and the right delay random value (Rr) are extracted (S302). ).

  Next, the left reel timer value (Lt) is calculated based on the left delay random number value (Lr) extracted in step S302, and is set in the left delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S303). The medium reel timer value (Ct) is calculated based on the medium delay random number value (Cr) extracted in step S4, and is set in the medium delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S304). A right reel timer value (Rt) is calculated based on the extracted right delay random number value (Rr) and set in the right delay timer counter assigned to the RAM 507 (S305).

  Next, a reel delay command capable of specifying the left reel timer value (Lt), the middle reel timer value (Ct), and the right reel timer value (Rt) set in steps S303, S304, and S305, respectively, is serially communicated. The data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the circuit 511 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (S306). Accordingly, the sub-control unit 91 can specify the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective by taking into account the acceleration time of the reels.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the left reel has started rotating (S307). If the left reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, if the rotation of the left reel has not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the left delay timer counter is 0 (S308).

  If the value of the left delay timer counter is not 0 in step S308, the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, if the value of the left delay timer counter is 0, the rotation start of the left reel is set, the rotation of the left reel is started (S309), and the process proceeds to step S310.

  Here, the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter are each one each time the timer interrupt process (main) executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times. Since the value is subtracted, the time of (left reel timer value × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the left delay timer counter. Further, as described above, the timer value for the left reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move by one symbol. Rotation of the left reel starts at a timing that randomly changes in the range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S310, it is determined whether or not the middle reel has started rotating. If the middle reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the middle reel has not started rotating, it is determined whether or not the value of the middle delay timer counter is 0 (S311).

  If the value of the middle delay timer counter is not 0 in step S311, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the value of the middle delay timer counter is 0, the middle reel is set to start rotation. After the middle reel starts to be rotated (S312), the process proceeds to step S313.

  Here, as described above, the timer counter value (main) that is executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times for each of the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Since 1 is subtracted every time, the time of (timer value for left reel × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the timer counter for middle delay. In addition, as described above, the timer value for the middle reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move by one symbol. Rotation of the middle reel starts at a timing that randomly changes in the range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S313, it is determined whether or not the right reel has started rotating. If the right reel has started rotating, the process proceeds to step S316. On the other hand, if the rotation of the right reel has not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the right delay timer counter is 0 (S314).

  If the value of the right delay timer counter is not 0 in step S314, the process proceeds to step S316. On the other hand, if the value of the right delay timer counter is 0, the rotation start of the right reel is set, the rotation of the right reel is started (S315), and the process proceeds to step S316.

  Here, as described above, the timer counter value (main) that is executed approximately every 0.56 ms is executed 60 times for each of the left delay timer counter value, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Since 1 is subtracted every time, the time of (timer value for right reel × 0.56 × 60) ms is counted by the right delay timer counter. Also, as described above, the timer value for the right reel is a value in the range of 0 to 20, and in Example 9, it takes about 33.6 ms for the reel to move one symbol. Rotation of the right reel starts at a timing that randomly changes within a range from 0 to once around the reel.

  In step S316, it is determined whether or not all reels have started rotating. If any one of the reels has not started rotating, the process returns to step S307, and all reels have started rotating. For example, the process proceeds to step S317 and waits until the acceleration of all reels is completed.

  When the acceleration of all the reels is completed in the step of S317, the stop operation is set to be valid, and accordingly, the stop operation of each reel is validated (S318), and the post-reel effect acceleration processing is ended.

  In Example 9, after the reel effect accompanying the controlled freezing state is completed, the above-described acceleration process after the reel effect is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. When the left reel delay time (left reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) that fluctuates in the range until it circulates has elapsed, the left reel starts rotating, and after all reels stop, 0 to reel 1 When the intermediate reel delay time (medium reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) elapses in the range until the lap is elapsed, the middle reel starts to rotate, and after all reels stop, 0 to reel 1 After the right reel delay time (right reel timer value × 0.56 × 60 ms) that has fluctuated in the range until the lap has elapsed, the middle reel starts to rotate and all reels reach a constant speed. Stop operation of each reel becomes effective

  As described above, in Example 9, after the reel effect, all the plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and the time until each reel rotates is randomly changed for each reel, so that the reel effect is stopped after the reel effect. Before the operation is activated, the relative positional relationship between the three reels changes randomly, and a reel effect is performed in which the specific symbols are arranged in a straight line. However, even if such a reel effect is not performed, the difficulty level of the reel stop operation does not change after the stop operation becomes effective after that. That is, even when the reel effect is performed, a certain regularity that does not occur if the reel effect is not performed does not occur, and the display result is derived by technical intervention by the player by performing the reel effect. The gameplay of the slot machine is not compromised.

  Also, before starting the rotation of any of the reels, a reel timer command that randomly determines a reel timer value that randomly varies for all reels, and a reel delay command that can specify the determined reel timer value is sub-control unit 91 is transmitted. Further, since the reel acceleration time is constant, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the reel delay command adds the reel acceleration time to the timing to start rotation of each reel at a constant speed. And the timing at which the stop operation becomes valid can be specified. For this reason, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command to that effect each time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 performs constant-speed rotation at the timing at which each reel starts to rotate. It becomes possible to specify the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is effective, and to control the production etc. in accordance with the specified timing.

  In Example 9, after the reel effect, all reels are temporarily stopped, and then the relative positional relationship between the reels is made random by shifting the timing for starting the rotation of the reels. After the production, after setting all reels to the first speed slower than the constant speed rotation, the relative positional relationship between the reels is changed by shifting the timing of accelerating the reel speed toward the constant speed rotation. The reels can be configured to be random, or after reel production, all reels can be set to a second speed faster than the constant speed rotation, and then the reel speed can be shifted to decelerate toward the constant speed rotation. The relative positional relationship between them may be random.

  Further, in Example 9, after the reel effect, the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value, which change at random, at the stage before starting the rotation of the reel that starts the rotation first, are respectively set. The reel delay command that can determine the determined left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Before starting, the left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value that change randomly are determined, and the determined left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value are specified. If the configuration is such that a possible reel delay command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the same effect as described above can be obtained. For example, a game start operation is performed. The left reel timer value, middle reel timer value, and right reel timer value that change randomly at the timing when the game is started, that is, the timing before being controlled to the freeze state, are determined, and the determined left reel timer value and middle reel timer are determined. Even when the reel delay command capable of specifying the value and the right reel timer value is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 performs the same every time rotation of each reel starts or acceleration is completed. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the timing at which each reel starts to rotate, the timing at which the reels rotate at a constant speed, and the timing at which the stop operation is valid, and sends the effects in accordance with these specified timings. Etc. can be controlled.

  Further, in Example 9, the delay time of each reel varies randomly within the range of the time that the reel makes 0 to 1 rotation, and the relative positional relationship can be shifted to the maximum, and It is possible to prevent the reel delay time from becoming longer than necessary.

  In Example 9, the timer counter for left delay is executed each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed M times (number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves). Since the delay time is counted by decrementing the middle delay timer counter and the right delay timer counter one by one, the left delay timer counter is added each time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. There is no need to update the delay timer counter and right delay timer counter, and it is possible to reduce the load of timer interrupt processing (main) related to timing, as well as left delay timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay The capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the timer counter can also be reduced.

  The number of times the timer interruption process (main) executed while one symbol moves to each of the left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value / N (N is a natural number, In addition, the value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is divisible) is assigned to the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter. Set and count each delay time by decrementing the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter by one each time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed N times Even in such a configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter There is no need to renew, and the load of timer interrupt processing (main) related to timing can be reduced, and the capacity of the RAM 507 allocated to the left delay timer counter, the middle delay timer counter, and the right delay timer counter can be reduced. Can do.

  The left reel timer value, the middle reel timer value, and the right reel timer value are each delayed by a value obtained by multiplying the number of times the timer interrupt process (main) executed while one symbol moves is executed. Timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay timer counter are set to the left delay timer counter, middle delay timer counter, and right delay timer counter each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The delay time may be timed by subtracting one by one, and with this structure, there is no need to perform different processing for each time of execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) for the time counting of the delay time. The processing can be shared without providing a branch with respect to the number of times of the timer interrupt processing (main) regarding the time measurement of the delay time.

  As mentioned above, although Example 1-Example 9 were demonstrated, the reel production | presentation control in the period which is generating freeze is not limited to these examples, The change in the range which does not deviate from the main point of the invention shown in each example, Needless to say, even if there is an addition, it is included in the present invention. In addition, a configuration that is the same as or similar to the other examples has the same effect as that described in the other examples. Moreover, it can apply about each example also about the modified example illustrated in the other example.

  Further, in the above-described examples and examples, the variable display device is configured such that the symbols are displayed while continuously changing on the see-through window 3 by rotating a reel having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer periphery. Instead of the reel, a variable display device may be used in which a belt on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery is moved so that the symbols are continuously displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3. Furthermore, by displaying an image in which identification information such as a pattern image is periodically moved in a predetermined order on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display, the identification information is displayed on the display screen while being continuously changed. A display device may be applied.

[Control during freeze period]
In the above-described embodiment, when a result lottery is performed by operating any of the stop switches 8L to 8R during the reel production being frozen, the result control data and the reel production period counter corresponding to the lottery result are newly set. The example (Sf8 in FIG. 28) in which the freeze and the reel effect are controlled by setting to (the previous control data and the reel effect period counter are discarded) has been described.

  In other words, during the reel production being frozen, any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated to execute the reel production based on the result control data, and a new reel is generated from the timing related to the execution of the reel production. An effect period counter is set, and the progress of the game is delayed over the reel effect period counter. For this reason, for example, even though the operation is accepted and the reel production based on the operation has been executed quickly, the reel production period counter based on the operation is added to the reel production period counter before the operation. It is possible to prevent inconsistency between the freeze period and the reel effect such that only the freeze period continues after that). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that makes the player feel uncomfortable due to the freeze period and the reel effect.

  However, the control during the freeze period may be performed as follows. For example, when a result lottery is performed by operating any of the stop switches 8L to 8R during the reel production during the freeze, the result control according to the lottery result is performed in the reel production period counter (remaining counter) at that time. A value corresponding to the data is added, and control data for executing a reel effect corresponding to the remaining counter (for example, data for performing reel rotation control in a predetermined manner) is controlled according to the lottery result. By adding to the data, the reel effect based on the result control data corresponding to the lottery result may be executed until the specific timing that does not change depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R is reached. .

  That is, while the reel effect is being frozen, any one of the stop switches 8L to 8R is operated to start the reel effect based on the result control data, regardless of the operation timing and the reel effect start timing. The reel effect is executed until reaching a specific timing (such as a timing at which the total time of the execution time of the reel rotation control executed before the operation and the execution time of the result control started by the operation elapses). Similarly, when a predetermined operation (operations on the MAXBET switch 6 and the start switch 7 in the above-described embodiment) is performed while the reel effect based on the result control data is being performed, the predetermined operation is also performed. While the reel effect based on the reel rotation control data is started, the specific timing (the execution time of the result control that was executed before the operation and the operation is started regardless of the operation timing and the reel effect start timing) The reel effect is executed until the total time with the execution time of the reel rotation control is reached. For this reason, the reel effect can be executed in accordance with the freeze period. As a result, for example, the reel effect based on the operation is received and the reel effect based on the operation is quickly executed, but the reel effect period counter based on the operation is added to the reel effect period counter before the operation. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience of causing the player to have an impression that they have been in vain due to the fact that only the freeze period continues after that. The entertainment of the game can be improved by the reel production. The specific timing may be a common timing that is not affected by the stop switch operation timing or the timing at which the reel effect is started.

[Freeze lottery]
In the freeze lottery in the embodiment described above, an example is described in which it is determined whether or not to generate a freeze, and when it is determined to generate a freeze, the type of reel effect to be executed during the freeze is determined. The example in which the lottery ratio is constant as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 has been described. However, the lottery ratio used for the freeze lottery is not limited to a fixed one, but may be varied depending on whether a predetermined condition is established. In the following, a freeze lottery is performed in relation to RB1, and in the slot machine that generates a freeze and executes a reel effect in the same manner as in the previous embodiment according to the result of the freeze lottery, it is performed in association with RB1. A lottery ratio used for freeze lottery (hereinafter also referred to as RB related freeze lottery) will be described.

  As a first example, the lottery ratio used for the RB related freeze lottery may be varied depending on, for example, the type of gaming state controlled at the time of RB1 winning. For example, RB-related freeze lottery is performed at different draw ratios when the game state at the time of winning RB1 is one of RT0, RT1, and RT3 and when RT2 has a high replay probability. When winning, a freeze may be generated at a predetermined timing (during RB, at the end of RB, after the end of RB, etc.). As a result, the RB related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate depending on the gaming state when RB1 is won for transition to RB1, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result. Therefore, the reel effects during the freeze It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  As a second example, in the above-described embodiment, freezing may occur even during the internal RT4 from RB1 winning to winning (FIG. 24, etc.), but the internal RT4 from RB1 winning to winning (specific) The number of times that the freeze occurred (whether or not the freeze occurred, or the number of times), and the number of times that an advantageous outcome such as the winning eye, double cherry, or triple cherry appeared during the freeze (advantageous) The lottery ratio used for the RB-related freeze lottery may be varied according to the presence or absence of the appearance or the number of times. For example, in the internal RT4 from RB1 winning to winning a prize, RB related freeze lottery is performed at different lottery ratios when a freeze occurs and when a freeze does not occur. Freezing may be generated at the end of the RB or after the end of the RB. As a result, RB-related freeze lottery is performed at different rates depending on the presence / absence / number of freezes during RT4 in the interior from RB1 winning to winning, and freeze and reel effects are executed based on the results. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the reel production inside.

  As a third example, during RB1, a navigation effect such as “It's left!” Is executed when the RB left bell is elected, and a navigation effect such as “It is right!” Is executed when the RB right bell is won. Depending on the number of times the left reel 2L has been first stopped (or the number of times the RB left bell has been won if operated in accordance with the navigation effect), the lottery ratio used for the RB-related freeze lottery is varied. Freezing may be generated at the timing (during RB, when RB ends, after RB ends, etc.). As a result, the RB-related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate depending on the number of times the left reel 2L is first stopped during RB1, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  As a fourth example, the lottery ratio used for the RB-related freeze lottery may be varied according to the game content in RT4 during the internal period from RB1 winning to winning. For example, in the internal RT4 from winning RB1 to winning a prize, RB related freezes with different lottery ratios when the number of times the RB left bell is won is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more and when it is less than the predetermined number When a lottery is performed and a freeze is won, a freeze may be generated at a predetermined timing (during RB, at the end of RB, after RB ends, etc.). As a result, the RB-related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate depending on the game content in the internal RT4 from the RB1 winning to the winning, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result, so the reel effects during the freeze It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  As a fifth example, the lottery ratio used for the RB related freeze lottery may be varied according to the time required for the predetermined game from the start to the end of RB1. For example, when the main control unit 41 can specify the time during which the reel is rotating in a predetermined game from the start to the end of RB1, and the reel rotation time is a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) or more. RB-related freeze lottery may be performed at a different lottery ratio than when the time is less than the predetermined time, and freeze may be generated at a predetermined timing (for example, during RB, at the end of RB, after RB has ended), etc. . As a result, the RB-related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate depending on the time required for the predetermined game from the start to the end of RB1, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for reel production in the game.

  As a sixth example, the lottery ratio used for the RB related freeze lottery may be varied according to the operation procedure in the RB left bell winning game during RB1. For example, RB-related freeze lottery is performed at different lottery ratios when the operation procedure in the RB left bell winning game during B1 is left → middle → right and when left → right → middle. When the freeze is won, the freeze may be generated at a predetermined timing (during RB, at the end of RB, after RB ends, etc.). As a result, the RB-related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate according to the operation procedure in the RB left bell winning game during RB1, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  As a seventh example, the lottery ratio used for the RB-related freeze lottery may be varied according to the number of digest games in RT4 in the interior from RB1 winning to winning. For example, RB-related freeze lottery is performed at different draw ratios when the number of digest games in RT4 from the RB1 winning to winning is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 6) and less than the predetermined number, When winning, a freeze may be generated at a predetermined timing (during RB, at the end of RB, after the end of RB, etc.). As a result, the RB-related freeze lottery is performed at a different rate according to the number of digested games in the internal RT4 from the RB1 winning to the winning, and the freeze and reel effects are executed based on the result. The player's expectation for the performance can be improved.

  In addition, the slot machine which applied any one example among the 1st-7th examples may be sufficient, and the slot machine which applied several examples may be sufficient.

[Subjects to specify the production status by operating procedure]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, depending on whether or not the operation procedure determined by the main control unit 41 side matches the operation procedure actually operated, it is close to reaching the ceiling. Although the example which specifies whether or not was described, the object to specify is not restricted to this. For example, it may be specified whether or not the bonus confirmation to be determined in Se3 in FIG. 24 has been notified, and whether or not the continuous production for strong watermelon to be determined in Se8 is being performed. It may be specified. Whether or not the bonus procedure has been notified is determined by the navigation that can specify the operation procedure only when the operation procedure information is received after the bonus control is confirmed on the sub-control unit 91 until the bonus is awarded. It becomes possible to specify by performing the production. Whether or not the strong watermelon continuous effect is being performed is determined only when the operation procedure information is received from the start to the end of the strong watermelon continuous effect on the sub-control unit 91 side. It becomes possible to specify by executing an identifiable navigation effect.

[How to identify whether the ceiling is approaching]
In the embodiment described above, whether the operation procedure determined by the main control unit 41 side matches the operation procedure actually operated as shown in FIGS. Although the example specified by whether or not is described, the specifying method is not limited to this. For example, in the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, it is possible to specify that the bonus has been won on the main control unit 41 side, and it is recommended that the left reel 2L be first stopped during non-AT. Therefore, RT1 and RT2 are not controlled during non-AT. Focusing on this point, the main control unit 41 performs a process of resetting (counting to 0) the count when a bonus is won or controlled by RT1 and RT2 every time one game is consumed. The flag just before the ceiling may be set when the counted value reaches 970, for example.

[Freeze occurs during bonus directing]
In the embodiment described above, a freeze effect can occur during execution of the bonus effect, but in this case, the bonus winning is confirmed and notified by the occurrence of the freeze effect. You may make it alert | report the battle result of a continuous production for a bonus, and you may make it complete | finish a bonus continuous production. Further, execution of the freeze effect may be prohibited so that the freeze effect does not occur during execution of the bonus continuous effect.

[Advantages and benefits]
In the embodiment described above, as an example having a high advantage for the player, it is exemplified that there is a high probability of giving the navigation stock for specifying the number of games that can be controlled by the AT, and that there are many expected grants. However, the high degree of advantage for the player is not limited to the presence / absence of the navigation stock or the number of grants. For example, the number of games that can be controlled by the AT is determined, and the AT is controlled until the determined number of games is consumed. The number of games that can be controlled by the AT may be large. In addition, when the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed is determined and the AT is controlled until the navigation effect is executed, the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed is large. There may be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a privilege such as Navistock that directly affects the payout rate of medals has been described. However, the privilege may be a value that improves the player's advantage, and may be a value that does not directly affect the medal payout rate, for example. Specifically, for example, the sub-control unit 91 suggests whether or not the slot machine that can be controlled to a high probability state with a high probability of winning the AT lottery and a low probability state with a low probability of winning is a high probability state. Execution of a suggestion effect for the user, execution of a premier effect with sound on the liquid crystal display 51 (special character appearance, execution of a special bonus effect during the next generated bonus, etc.), presenting predetermined achievement conditions The slot machine 1 is installed by executing a mission effect that gives value by being achieved within a predetermined period, executing a set value suggesting effect to suggest a set value that has been set, and collecting a certain number Granting points that can be exchanged for services determined at a designated amusement store, downloading bonus videos and bonus information on a predetermined website It is capable QR code (registered trademark), or the like can be displayed in the liquid crystal display device 51.

[About slot machines]
In the above-described embodiment, a variable display device having three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided. When all the reels are stopped, one game is finished, and according to a combination of display results derived to the three reels. The slot machine where a prize is generated was explained. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and using one game value for one game By setting a predetermined number of bets, the game can be started, and when the display result is derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas, one game is completed, and the plurality of results are obtained as a result of one game. A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived in each of the variable display areas has been described. However, when a display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display device. As long as the slot machine can be generated, the slot machine is not limited to one having a variable display device having three reels, but has a single reel or a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of bets using game balls as game values. Or a full credit type slot machine that uses only credit as a gaming value to set the number of bets. When game balls are used as game values, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls by winning. Any of the slot machines can be used.

  In addition, the gaming machine that embodies the present invention is not limited to the slot machine as described above, and may be any gaming machine that allows a player to play a predetermined game. As a gaming machine, for example, a game medium (for example, a pachinko ball) is driven into a predetermined game area, and the game medium that has been driven passes (wins) through a start area (for example, a start port) provided in the game area. The display state of the variable display device can be changed, and when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols), a specific game state (big prize) that is advantageous to the player It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a state in which the mouth is opened in a predetermined manner) or an enclosed pachinko gaming machine that uses an enclosed gaming medium.

[Identification information with the same and / or similar outer shape]
In the above-described embodiment, “lip a” and “lip b” are used to describe identification information having the same and / or similar outer shape. However, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, similar identification information can be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the same and / or similar symbols when a watermelon symbol is taken as an example. FIG. 60 shows determination results having the same, similar, or dissimilar outer shape when compared with other identification information when the watermelon symbol in this embodiment is used as one identification information.

  FIG. 60 (x) shows a watermelon symbol as one piece of identification information, and other pieces of identification information that are the same, similar, and dissimilar to this are shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to (j). First, identification information having the same outer shape as that of one identification information will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), other identification information that is the same in outer shape as one identification information but different in overall color and pattern is identification information having the same outer shape as the one identification information. For example, a watermelon design having the same outer shape as the watermelon design in the present embodiment but having a different overall color and pattern is a design having the same outer shape as the watermelon design in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), other identification information that is the same as the one identification information but different in some colors and patterns is the identification information having the same outer shape as the one identification information. . For example, a watermelon design having the same outer shape as that of the watermelon design in this embodiment but having a different color or pattern is the same design as the watermelon design in this embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60C to 60I, the identification information having the similar outer shape to the one identification information will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (c), other identification information that is different from the one identification information only in size is identification information similar in shape to the one identification information. For example, a watermelon design that differs only in size from the watermelon design in this embodiment is a design that is similar in outline to the watermelon design in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 60D, other identification information that is different in that it includes a plurality of pieces of identification information having the same outer shape as the one identification information is identification information having a similar outer shape to the one identification information. For example, a watermelon symbol in which a plurality of watermelon symbols having the same outer shape as the watermelon symbol in this embodiment overlap is a symbol having a similar outer shape to the watermelon symbol in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (e1) and (e2), other identification information that is different in that a character is added to one identification information is identification information having a similar outer shape to the one identification information. For example, the watermelon design in which the character is attached to the upper part of the flesh of the watermelon design in the present embodiment, or the watermelon design in which the character is attached to the lower portion of the flesh of the watermelon design in the present embodiment is the watermelon design in the present embodiment. The design is similar in shape.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (f), other identification information that is different from one identification information in terms of orientation and that is conceptually the same as one identification information is similar in appearance to the one identification information. Identification information. For example, a watermelon design whose direction is different from that of the watermelon design in this embodiment is a design having a similar external shape to the watermelon design in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (g), other identification information which is different in that a part of one piece of identification information is missing but has the same outer shape as a whole is similar in identification to the one identification information. Information. For example, a watermelon design in which a part of the flesh of the watermelon design in the present embodiment is missing but has the same outer shape as a whole is a design similar in shape to the watermelon design in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (h1) and (h2), other identification information that is different in that a part of one identification information is raised but has the same outer shape as the whole is different from one identification information. The outer shape becomes similar identification information. For example, a watermelon design in which a part of the flesh of the watermelon pattern in this embodiment is raised but the outer shape is the same as a whole, or a watermelon design in which the shape of a part of the flesh of the watermelon design is different but the outer shape is the same as the whole The watermelon design in this embodiment is a design similar in outer shape.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (i), other identification information reminiscent of one identification information is the identification information having a similar external shape to the one identification information. For example, even if the watermelon design is different from the watermelon design that is cut to about 1/4 as in the watermelon design in this embodiment, it is different in that it is cut to about 1/2 (the point that the cut is different) The watermelon design that conceptually recalls the same “watermelon” is a design that is similar in outline to the watermelon design in the present embodiment.

  Moreover, even if the identification information differs from the identification information shown in FIGS. 60C to 60I in a plurality of points, it is recognized that the identification information is conceptually the same as the identification information. If it is possible identification information, the identification information is similar to the identification information of one identification information. For example, even if the watermelon design is different between the point shown in FIG. 60C and the point shown in FIG. 60D, it can be said that the watermelon design in this embodiment has a similar external shape.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 (j), one identification information and identification information whose dissimilar outline is described.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (j), the identification information having the same outer shape as the identification information described in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) and the identification information described in FIGS. 60 (c) to 60 (i). The other identification information other than the identification information having the similar outer shape is the identification information having the dissimilar shape to the one identification information. For example, a bell design that is completely different from the watermelon design in this embodiment is a design that is dissimilar to the watermelon design in this embodiment.

  In FIG. 60, the one identification information shown in FIG. 60 (x) is the same as the other identification information shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), and the one identification information shown in FIG. Although the description has been given of the similar relationship with the other identification information shown in FIGS. 60C to 60I, the same identification information as that of the other identification information in FIGS. 60A to 60I is the same as the other identification information. Or it can be said that there is a similar relationship. That is, the identification information shown in FIGS. 60 (x) and (a) to (j) is a group of identification information whose outer shapes are the same or similar to each other.

[Conditions for transition from RT2 to RT3]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the transition to RT3 is stopped by stopping the transition start in RT2 has been described. However, the transition condition from RT2 to RT3 may be established by, for example, digesting a predetermined number of games, or may be established by generating a winning combination for a specific combination (for example, a falling lip).

[About specific combinations]
In the above-described embodiment, the description has been given using “lip b-lip a-lip a” derived on LM4 in FIG. 20C as the specific combination derived on LM4 in FIG. . That is, in the present embodiment, the specific combination is described using a combination composed only of the same and similar external shapes, and as an example, “lip b-lip a-lip a” is described. . However, other symbol combinations may be used as the specific combination composed only of symbols having the same and similar outer shape. Moreover, as a specific combination, the specific combination comprised only from a design with the same or similar external shape may be sufficient.

  For example, specific combinations including only the same and similar symbols of the outer shape include “lip b-lip a-lip b”, “lip b-lip b-lip a”, “lip a-lip a-lip b”. Or “lip a-lip b-lip a” or the like. That is, it is only necessary that the symbols constituting the specific combination are the same or similar, and all the symbols do not become the same symbol.

  In addition, the specific combination including only the symbols having the same or similar outer shape may be “lip a-lip a-lip a” or “lip b-lip b-lip b”. That is, it is only necessary that each symbol constituting the specific combination is composed only of “lip a” or “lip b” having a similar relationship.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20C, when a non-specific combination of Lip 5 “Bell-Lip a-Bell” is derived on the winning line LN, “Lip b” is displayed on the line LM4. Although the specific combination of “lip a-lip a” is derived, the specific combination is not limited to be derived on the line LM4 but may be derived on another line. Further, for example, when a non-specific combination of Lip 5 “Bell-Lip a-Bell” is derived on the winning line LN, it is not limited to letting one line derive a specific combination, but simultaneously specified on a plurality of lines. A combination may be derived. Moreover, the specific combination at this time is not limited to the same specific combination, and different specific combinations may be derived simultaneously on a plurality of lines. Further, as the number of lines from which a specific combination is derived increases, the gaming state may be controlled to be more advantageous to the player.

[About the first game state and the second game state]
In the embodiment described above, RT1 is exemplified as the first gaming state, and RT2 is exemplified as the advantageous state (hereinafter also referred to as the second gaming state). However, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are not limited to this as long as the necessity for notifying that the second gaming state is controlled is higher than that in the first gaming state. For example, the second gaming state is not limited to a gaming state that is not controlled without passing through the first gaming state, but may be a gaming state that is directly controlled from another gaming state without passing through the first gaming state. Good.

[About counting and displaying net increase]
As in the slot machine of the above-described embodiment, for example, even when the number of AT games becomes zero, when one or more navigation stocks remain, the navigation stock is consumed and immediately controlled again by the AT. For example, the net increment may be counted and displayed.

  (A) When the AT is notified and the AT is controlled, the net increment is set to the reference value of 0. If the net increment before the prize is 0 or more at the time of special lip winning, the net increment is calculated. Continue counting, if less than 0, set the net increment to 0 and then count. When the AT continuation effect is executed and controlled by the AT again, if the net increment before the execution is 0 or more, the net increment The number may be counted continuously, and if it is less than 0, the net increment may be set to 0 before counting. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
The right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state when the termination condition of one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied (when the remaining number of games becomes 0) ) Is granted, advantageous state re-control means for controlling the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by consuming the right (Navistock) without shifting to the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Advantageous state restart effect executing means for executing an advantageous state restart effect (AT continuation effect) indicating that the advantageous state has been started again when controlled to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by the advantageous state recontrol means; ,
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
First reference value setting means for setting a count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) to a reference value (0) when control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started;
When the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived in the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) and the state shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is the reference value. A second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) when less than (0);
When the advantageous state re-control means controls the advantageous state (AT + RT2), when the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the count value is converted to the reference value ( And a third reference value setting means for setting to (0).

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Thus, even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is calculated when the predetermined combination is derived and shifts to the advantageous state. Since returning to the reference value and counting thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the termination condition of one advantageous state based on the right to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied, the right to shift to the advantageous state remains, and the advantageous state restart effect indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous state again. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state at the time of execution of the is greater than or equal to the reference value, a series of advantageous states that continue without shifting to the normal state by maintaining the net increase as it is While the net increase in is displayed, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state becomes the reference value. On the other hand, if it becomes negative, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase is returned to the reference value and the subsequent count is performed, so the normal state is restored. Ream without transition Net increase in the series of advantageous conditions can be prevented from giving the player the impression that eroded to.

  (B) When the AT is notified and the AT is controlled, when the special lip is won, regardless of the net increase before the winning, the net increment is set to 0 and counted, and the AT continuous effect is executed. If the net increase before the execution is 0 or more when it is controlled again by the AT, it continues counting from the net increase, and if it is less than 0, the net increase is set to 0 and counted. Also good. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1), the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is the plurality When the specific result of any type (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) is selected from the specific results of the types, the specific operation mode (special replay winning condition is satisfied according to the type of the specific result Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying stop order) is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
The right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state when the termination condition of one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied (when the remaining number of games becomes 0) ) Is granted, advantageous state re-control means for controlling the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by consuming the right (Navistock) without shifting to the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Advantageous state restart effect executing means for executing an advantageous state restart effect (AT continuation effect) indicating that the advantageous state has been started again when controlled to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by the advantageous state recontrol means; ,
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
In the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1), when the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived and shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is used as a reference value. First reference value setting means for setting to (0);
When the advantageous state re-control means controls the advantageous state (AT + RT2), when the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the count value is converted to the reference value ( And a second reference value setting means for setting to 0).

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Thus, even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is calculated when the predetermined combination is derived and shifts to the advantageous state. Since returning to the reference value and counting thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the termination condition of one advantageous state based on the right to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied, the right to shift to the advantageous state remains, and the advantageous state restart effect indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous state again. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state at the time of execution of the is greater than or equal to the reference value, a series of advantageous states that continue without shifting to the normal state by maintaining the net increase as it is While the net increase in is displayed, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state becomes the reference value. On the other hand, if it becomes negative, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase is returned to the reference value and the subsequent count is performed, so the normal state is restored. Ream without transition Net increase in the series of advantageous conditions can be prevented from giving the player the impression that eroded to.

  (C) When the AT confirmation notification is performed and controlled by the AT, when the AT start effect is executed, the count is set after setting the net increment to 0 regardless of the net increment before the execution, When the AT continuation effect is executed and controlled again by the AT, if the net increase before the execution is 0 or more, the count continues from the net increase, and if it is less than 0, the net increase is set to 0 and counted. To do. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), or the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results If the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is not derived in spite of the fact that the specific notification (navigation effect) has been made (any one of the 3 choice replies 4 to 6), a numerical value (the number of remaining games) Numerical value updating means for starting update)
When the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means satisfies the end condition (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right to move to the advantageous state (Navistock) is terminated. Advantageous state termination means
An update start effect executing means for executing an update start effect (AT start effect) indicating that the update of the value is started when the value update means starts updating the value (number of remaining games);
The right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state when the termination condition of one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right (Navistock) to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied (when the remaining number of games becomes 0) ) Is granted, advantageous state re-control means for controlling the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by consuming the right (Navistock) without shifting to the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Advantageous state restart effect executing means for executing an advantageous state restart effect (AT continuation effect) indicating that the advantageous state has been started again when controlled to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by the advantageous state recontrol means; ,
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed in the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1), the counting means (pure increment counter) regardless of whether or not the state has shifted to the advantageous state (AT + RT2). First reference value setting means for setting the count value by the reference value (0);
When the advantageous state re-control means controls the advantageous state (AT + RT2), when the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the count value is converted to the reference value ( And a second reference value setting means for setting to 0).

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is returned to the reference value when the update start effect is executed. Since the subsequent counting is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the termination condition of one advantageous state based on the right to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied, the right to shift to the advantageous state remains, and the advantageous state restart effect indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous state again. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state at the time of execution of the is greater than or equal to the reference value, a series of advantageous states that continue without shifting to the normal state by maintaining the net increase as it is While the net increase in is displayed, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state becomes the reference value. On the other hand, if it becomes negative, it is controlled again to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state restart effect indicating that effect is executed, the net increase is returned to the reference value and the subsequent count is performed, so the normal state is restored. Ream without transition Net increase in the series of advantageous conditions can be prevented from giving the player the impression that eroded to.

  In addition, when the update start effect is executed, even if it does not shift to the advantageous state, the update of the numerical value that is the determination target of the end condition starts, so the specific notification is performed in the specific notification state In this case, it is possible to prompt the operation of the derivation operation means in the operation mode specified by the specific notification.

  In addition, in the above (a) to (c), the determination result of the predetermining unit may be a configuration in which a plurality of types of specific results can be determined only in the specific notification state, or a plurality of types of determination results in both the normal state and the specific notification state. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined. The specific notification state includes a first state that shifts from the normal state and a second state that shifts when the transition condition is satisfied in the first state. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined.

  Further, in the above-described (a) to (c), the specific notification state indicates that the type of the specific result is obtained when the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plurality of types of specific results. However, it does not matter whether or not the state is more advantageous than the normal state except that it is at least more advantageous than the normal state in that specific notification that can identify the specific operation mode according to the above is performed.

  In addition, in the above (a) to (c), the advantageous state means that the probability that a display result advantageous to the player is derived and the probability that the display result advantageous to the player is permitted are higher than the normal state. The increase rate of the net increase is higher than that in the normal state due to the notification of the operation mode for deriving or displaying the display result advantageous to the player.

  The numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means in the above (c) is a numerical value used when the advantageous state ending means determines whether or not the ending condition is satisfied. For example, the number of games and the result of the internal lottery are The number of times that a predetermined result has been obtained, the number of times that a display result has become a predetermined display result in a plurality of variable display areas, the total value of game values assigned, the above-described net increase, and the like are applicable.

  In (c), the numerical value updating means need not be configured to uniformly subtract or add numerical values, but can be increased or decreased such that the numerical value is subtracted when the subtraction condition is satisfied and added when the addition condition is satisfied. But you can.

  In addition, in (c), the update start effect is at least when the transition to the advantageous state is performed in the specific notification state, or the determination result of the prior determination means is any type of the plurality of types of specific results. As long as the result is that the specific notification is performed and the predetermined combination is not derived, it may be executed, or a configuration that is executed at other times.

  In the above (a) to (c), the advantageous state re-control means may be configured to immediately control the advantageous state after the termination condition of one advantageous state based on the right to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied. In addition, after the termination condition of one of the advantageous states based on the right to shift to the advantageous state is satisfied, the advantageous state may be temporarily ended and then shifted to the advantageous state when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example of counting the net increase during the AT by the net increase counting process has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the count of the net increase is continued until the specific condition is satisfied even when the AT ends. When the AT is notified until the specific condition is satisfied and the control is again performed by the AT, the counted net increase is taken over, counted from the net increase, and the AT is determined until the specific condition is satisfied. The net increment may be reset when the confirmation notification is not performed. That is, the net increase in a series of periods composed of ATs continuously generated until the specific condition is satisfied may be maintained. Further, not only during the AT but also during the bonus, the net increase may be counted as in the AT. For example, even if the AT or bonus is completed, the counting of the net increase is continued until the specific condition is satisfied, and the AT confirmation notification or bonus winning confirmation notification is performed until the specific condition is satisfied, and the AT or control is again performed. -When controlled by Nasu, it takes over the counted net increment, counts from the net increment, and increases when there is no AT notification or bonus winning notification until the specified condition is met. The number may be reset. That is, the net increase in a series of periods consisting of ATs and bonuses generated continuously until the specific condition is satisfied may be maintained. The specific condition may be established by, for example, digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of remaining AT games reaches 0, if the number of remaining navigation stock is 1 or more, an example of immediately controlling to AT using a new navigation stock has been described. Not limited to this, when the AT remaining game number reaches 0, even if the remaining navigation stock number is 1 or more, after the AT is temporarily terminated, until a specific condition that is a reset condition of the net increment is satisfied. Alternatively, the AT may be controlled again to the AT confirmation notification AT. Specifically, even if the number of remaining navigation stocks is 1 or more, it is controlled to a latent period in which the AT is hidden without performing the navigation effect in the same manner as when the ART was terminated without the number of navigation stocks. You may make it do. The incubation period may be a period until the specific condition is satisfied, and conversely, the specific condition may be a condition that is satisfied after the incubation period has elapsed. In such a slot machine, the net increment may be counted and displayed as follows.

  (I) When the AT is notified and the AT is controlled after the specific condition is established and the AT is controlled, the net increase is set to the reference value 0, and then the net increase before the winning is 0 when the special lip is won. If it is above, it will continue counting from the net increment, and if it is less than 0, it will count after setting the net increment to 0, whereas AT will be notified and the AT will be controlled until the specific condition is met. If the net increase before the AT notification is confirmed is 0 or more, counting may be continued from the net increase, and if less than 0, the net increase may be set to 0 before counting. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), or the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results If the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is not derived in spite of the fact that the specific notification (navigation effect) has been made (any one of the 3 choice replies 4 to 6), a numerical value (the number of remaining games) Numerical value updating means for starting update)
When the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means satisfies the end condition (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right to move to the advantageous state (Navistock) is terminated. Advantageous state termination means
An update start effect executing means for executing an update start effect (AT start effect) indicating that the update of the value is started when the value update means starts updating the value (number of remaining games);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after completion of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
When the control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started except for the period until the specific condition is satisfied (period until 32 games have elapsed) after the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the counting means (net increase) First reference value setting means for setting a count value by a number counter) to a reference value (0);
After the advantageous state (AT + RT2) ends, control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started except for a period until the specific condition is satisfied (a period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3) , AT + RT1), when the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived and the advantageous state (AT + RT2) is entered, and the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0) Second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0);
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied (a period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed in AT + RT1) and the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the state has shifted to the advantageous state (AT + RT2). Regardless of whether or not, a third reference value setting means for setting the count value (0) to the reference value may be provided.

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Thus, even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is calculated when the predetermined combination is derived and shifts to the advantageous state. Since returning to the reference value and counting thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the control of the specific notification state is started again during the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous state, it is continuously counted from the previous advantageous state when the update start effect is executed. If the net increase is equal to or greater than the reference value, the net increase in the continuous advantageous state is displayed until the specific condition is satisfied by maintaining the net increase as it is, while the net increase is not changed. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, the net increase is set to the reference value when the advantageous state start effect is executed. Since the subsequent counting is performed after returning, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase in a series of advantageous states that have continued until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when the update start effect is executed, even if it does not shift to the advantageous state, the update of the numerical value that is the determination target of the end condition starts, so the specific notification is performed in the specific notification state In this case, it is possible to prompt the operation of the derivation operation means in the operation mode specified by the specific notification.

  (Ii) At the time of special lip winning after the AT is notified and the AT is controlled after the specific condition is satisfied, the net increment is set to 0 regardless of the net increment before the winning and counting is performed. At the time of special lip winning after the AT is notified and controlled by the AT until the specific condition is satisfied, if the net increase before the winning is 0 or more, the net increase is continuously counted and less than 0 If so, the net increment may be set to 0 before counting. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after completion of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started except for a period until the specific condition is satisfied (period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived in AT + RT1) and the state shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is set to the reference value (0). 1 reference value setting means;
Control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied after the advantageous state (AT + RT2) ends (the period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1). ), When the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived and shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0). And a second reference value setting unit that sets the count value to the reference value (0).

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Thus, even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is calculated when the predetermined combination is derived and shifts to the advantageous state. Since returning to the reference value and counting thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when control of the specific notification state is started again in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous state, when the transition to the advantageous state is made by deriving a predetermined combination, the previous advantageous state is If the net increment that is continuously counted is equal to or greater than the reference value, the net increment in the continuous advantageous state is displayed until the specific condition is satisfied by maintaining the net increment as it is. When the net increase that is continuously counted from the previous advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value at the time when the advantageous state is shifted to when the combination is derived, the predetermined combination is derived. Since the net increment is returned to the reference value at the time of transition to the advantageous state and the subsequent counting is performed, the impression that the net increment in the series of consecutive advantageous states has decreased until the specific condition is satisfied is given to the player Given That would be prevented.

  (Iii) At the time of special lip winning after the AT is notified and the AT is controlled after the specific condition is satisfied, the net increment is set to 0 regardless of the net increment before the winning and counting is performed. When the AT is notified and the AT is controlled until the specific condition is established and the AT is controlled, the liquid crystal display 51 informs the remaining AT game number when the AT start effect is executed. If it is 0 or more, counting may be continued from the net increment, and if less than 0, the net increment may be set to 0 before counting. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), or the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results If the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is not derived in spite of the fact that the specific notification (navigation effect) has been made (any one of the 3 choice replies 4 to 6), a numerical value (the number of remaining games) Numerical value updating means for starting update)
When the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means satisfies the end condition (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right to move to the advantageous state (Navistock) is terminated. Advantageous state termination means
An update start effect executing means for executing an update start effect (AT start effect) indicating that the update of the value is started when the value update means starts updating the value (number of remaining games);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after completion of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started except for a period until the specific condition is satisfied (period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived in AT + RT1) and the state shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is set to the reference value (0). 1 reference value setting means;
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied (a period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed in AT + RT1) and the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the state has shifted to the advantageous state (AT + RT2). Regardless of whether or not, a second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) may be provided.

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Thus, even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is calculated when the predetermined combination is derived and shifts to the advantageous state. Since returning to the reference value and counting thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the control of the specific notification state is started again in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous state, the previous advantageous is started when the advantageous state start effect suggesting the start of the advantageous state is executed. If the net increase continuously counted from the state is equal to or greater than the reference value, the net increase in the continuous advantageous state is displayed until the specific condition is satisfied by maintaining the net increase as it is. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state before the transition to the advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, the net increase is calculated when the update start effect is executed. Since the subsequent counting is performed after returning to the reference value, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase in a series of advantageous states that have continued until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when the update start effect is executed, even if it does not shift to the advantageous state, the update of the numerical value that is the determination target of the end condition starts, so the specific notification is performed in the specific notification state In this case, it is possible to prompt the operation of the derivation operation means in the operation mode specified by the specific notification.

  (Iv) When the AT notification is performed and the AT is controlled after the specific condition is established and the AT start effect is executed, regardless of whether or not the special lip is won and the RT2 is controlled. Regardless of the net increase before the AT start effect is executed, the net increase is counted after being set to 0. When the AT is notified and the AT is controlled until the specific condition is satisfied, the AT start effect is executed. When the net increase before execution of the AT start effect is 0 or more, counting may be continued from the net increase, and if it is less than 0, the net increase may be set to 0 before counting. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the special replay winning condition) according to the type of the specific result. Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (special replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
By giving the right (Navistock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2 (AT · RT2)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT · RT1), the pre-determining means (internal lottery) When the determination result is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the specific operation mode (special replay) corresponding to the type of the specific results Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying a stop condition satisfying the winning condition is performed;
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), or the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results If the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is not derived in spite of the fact that the specific notification (navigation effect) has been made (any one of the 3 choice replies 4 to 6), a numerical value (the number of remaining games) Numerical value updating means for starting update)
When the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means satisfies the end condition (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right to move to the advantageous state (Navistock) is terminated. Advantageous state termination means
An update start effect executing means for executing an update start effect (AT start effect) indicating that the update of the value is started when the value update means starts updating the value (number of remaining games);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after completion of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started except for a period until the specific condition is satisfied (period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed in AT + RT1), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is set to the reference value (regardless of whether or not the advantageous state (AT + RT2) has been entered). 0) first reference value setting means to be set;
After the end of the advantageous state (AT + RT2), control of the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied (a period until 32 games have elapsed), and the specific notification state (AT + RT3, When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed in AT + RT1) and the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the state has shifted to the advantageous state (AT + RT2). Regardless of whether or not, a second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) may be provided.

  According to this feature, the right to shift to the advantageous state is given, and after being controlled to the specific notification state, any type of specific result among a plurality of types of specific results is determined, and a predetermined combination is derived. Even if the net increase after the start of the specific notification state becomes negative with respect to the reference value before the transition to the advantageous state, the net increase is returned to the reference value when the update start effect is executed. Since the subsequent counting is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase after the start of the specific notification state is diminishing.

  In addition, when the control of the specific notification state is started again in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous state, the previous advantageous is started when the advantageous state start effect suggesting the start of the advantageous state is executed. If the net increase continuously counted from the state is equal to or greater than the reference value, the net increase in the continuous advantageous state is displayed until the specific condition is satisfied by maintaining the net increase as it is. If the net increase continuously counted from the previous advantageous state before the transition to the advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, the net increase is calculated when the update start effect is executed. Since the subsequent counting is performed after returning to the reference value, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase in a series of advantageous states that have continued until the specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, in the above (i) to (iv), a configuration in which a plurality of types of specific results can be determined only in the specific notification state as a determination result of the prior determination unit, or a plurality of types of both the normal state and the specific notification state may be determined. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined. The specific notification state includes a first state that shifts from the normal state and a second state that shifts when the transition condition is satisfied in the first state. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined.

  Further, in the above (i) to (iv), the specific notification state indicates that the type of the specific result is obtained when the determination result of the prior determination unit is any one of the plurality of types of specific results. However, it does not matter whether or not the state is more advantageous than the normal state except that it is at least more advantageous than the normal state in that specific notification that can identify the specific operation mode according to the above is performed.

  In addition, in the above (i) to (iv), the advantageous state means that the probability that a display result advantageous to the player is derived and the probability that the display result advantageous to the player is permitted are higher than the normal state. The increase rate of the net increase is higher than that in the normal state due to the notification of the operation mode for deriving or displaying the display result advantageous to the player.

  Further, the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means in the above (i), (iii), and (iv) is a numerical value used when determining whether or not the advantageous state ending means satisfies the ending condition. , The number of games, the number of times that the result of the internal lottery has become a predetermined result, the number of times that the display result has become a predetermined display result in a plurality of variable display areas, the total value of the assigned gaming value, the above net increase Is applicable.

  In (i), (iii), and (iv), the numerical value updating means does not need to be configured to uniformly subtract or add numerical values, and is subtracted when the subtraction condition is satisfied, and added when the addition condition is satisfied. The structure which can be increased / decreased like this may be sufficient.

  In addition, in (i), (iii), and (iv), the update start effect is at least when the transition to the advantageous state is performed in the specific notification state, or the determination result of the prior determination unit is the plurality of types of specific Any configuration that can be executed when the predetermined combination is not derived in spite of the specific notification of any kind of the result being performed but the specific notification is performed. But you can.

  (V) At the timing related to bonus winning (bonus winning confirmation notification timing, bonus winning timing, etc.), the net increase is set to the reference value of 0, and the AT is determined after the bonus is completed until the specific condition is satisfied After the notification is made and the AT is controlled, if the net increment at the time of special lip winning is less than 0, the net increment is set to 0 and counted. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result (stop order satisfying the prize condition for promotion replay). Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (promotion replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after the end of the special gaming state (bonus);
By giving a right (navigator stock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2) which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state (bonus) and more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1), When the determination result of the pre-decision means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the type of the specific result Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT / RT1, RT2) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying the specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the prize condition for promotion replay) is performed. ,
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
First reference value setting means for setting a count value by the counting means (pure increase counter) to a reference value (0) at a timing related to the start of the special gaming state (bonus) (special winning combination);
After the end of the special gaming state (bonus), control of the specific notification state (AT · RT1, RT2) is started in a period until a specific condition (a period until 32 games have passed) is established. When the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is derived in AT · RT1, RT2) and the state shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is the reference value (0). In the case where the count value is less than the value, a second reference value setting unit that sets the count value to the reference value (0) may be provided.

  According to this feature, when the control of the specific notification state is started in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the special gaming state ends, the special combination is derived when the special state is shifted to the advantageous state. If the net increase continuously counted from the gaming state is greater than or equal to the reference value, a series of transitions from the end of the special gaming state until the specific condition is satisfied by maintaining the net increase as it is While the net increase in the advantageous state is displayed, the net increase continuously counted from the special gaming state at the time of shifting to the advantageous state by deriving the predetermined combination has become negative with respect to the reference value In this case, since the net increase is returned to the reference value when the predetermined combination is derived and the subsequent counting is performed, the subsequent counting is continued until the specific condition is satisfied after the special gaming state ends. Migrate The impression that net increase in the series of advantageous state is eroded can be prevented from being given to the player.

  (Vi) At the timing related to bonus winning (bonus winning confirmation notification timing, bonus winning timing, etc.), the net increase is set to the reference value of 0, and the AT is determined after the bonus ends until the specific condition is satisfied After the notification is performed and the AT is controlled, when the AT start effect is executed, if the net increase before the execution is less than 0, the net increase is set to 0 and counted. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not the winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any kind of specific result (any one of the three-choice lips 4 to 6) among the plurality of types of specific results, the derivation operation means (stop The variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated in a specific operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result (stop order satisfying the prize condition for promotion replay). Control for deriving a predetermined combination (special replay winning mode), and the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates other than the specific operation mode (promotion replay) according to the type of the specific result. Display results other than the predetermined combination on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) when the player is operated in a stop order that does not satisfy the winning conditions of And deriving control means for performing control to derive,
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Normal state transition means for transitioning to the normal state (non-AT / RT1) after the end of the special gaming state (bonus);
By giving a right (navigator stock) to shift to an advantageous state (AT + RT2) which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state (bonus) and more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1), When the determination result of the pre-decision means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results (any one of the 3 alternatives 4 to 6), the type of the specific result Specific notification state control means for controlling to a specific notification state (AT / RT1, RT2) in which a specific notification (navigation effect) capable of specifying the specific operation mode (stop order satisfying the prize condition for promotion replay) is performed. ,
Advantageous state shifting means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2) by deriving the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) as a display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the specific notification state (AT + RT3, AT + RT1) shifts to the advantageous state (AT + RT2), or the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is any one of the plurality of types of specific results If the predetermined combination (special replay winning mode) is not derived in spite of the fact that the specific notification (navigation effect) has been made (any one of the 3 choice replies 4 to 6), a numerical value (the number of remaining games) Numerical value updating means for starting update)
When the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means satisfies the end condition (when the remaining number of games becomes 0), the one advantageous state (AT + RT2) based on the right to move to the advantageous state (Navistock) is terminated. Advantageous state termination means
An update start effect executing means for executing an update start effect (AT start effect) indicating that the update of the value is started when the value update means starts updating the value (number of remaining games);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
First reference value setting means for setting a count value by the counting means (pure increase counter) to a reference value (0) at a timing related to the start of the special gaming state (bonus) (special winning combination);
After the special gaming state (bonus) ends, the control of the specific notification state (AT · RT1, RT2) is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied (a period until 32 games have elapsed). When the update start effect (AT start effect) is executed at (AT · RT1, RT2), if the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0), the advantageous state ( A second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) regardless of whether or not the process has shifted to AT + RT2).

  According to this feature, after the end of the special gaming state, when the control of the specific notification state is started in a period until the specific condition is satisfied, it continues from the special gaming state when the update start effect is executed. If the counted net increase is greater than or equal to the reference value, the net increase in a series of advantageous states that have continuously shifted to the specific condition after the special gaming state is completed by maintaining the net increase as it is. On the other hand, if the net increase continuously counted from the special gaming state before shifting to the advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, the advantageous state start effect is executed. Since the net increment is returned to the reference value at the time and the subsequent count is performed, the impression that the net increment in the series of advantageous states that have transitioned continuously until the specific condition is satisfied after the special gaming state ends is decreasing For players That would give can be prevented.

  In addition, when the update start effect is executed, even if it does not shift to the advantageous state, the update of the numerical value that is the determination target of the end condition starts, so the specific notification is performed in the specific notification state In this case, it is possible to prompt the operation of the derivation operation means in the operation mode specified by the specific notification.

  In the above (v) and (vi), the determination result of the predetermining means may be configured such that a plurality of types of specific results can be determined only in the specific notification state, or a plurality of types of determination results in both the normal state and the specific notification state. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined. The specific notification state includes a first state that shifts from the normal state and a second state that shifts when the transition condition is satisfied in the first state. The configuration may be such that a specific result can be determined.

  Further, in (v) and (vi) above, the specific notification state indicates that the type of the specific result is obtained when the determination result of the prior determination means is any one of the plurality of types of specific results. However, it does not matter whether or not the state is more advantageous than the normal state except that it is at least more advantageous than the normal state in that specific notification that can identify the specific operation mode according to the above is performed.

  In the above (v) and (vi), the advantageous state means that the probability that a display result advantageous to the player is derived, and the probability that the display result advantageous to the player is permitted is higher than the normal state. The increase rate of the net increase is higher than that in the normal state due to the notification of the operation mode for deriving or displaying the display result advantageous to the player.

  The numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means in (vi) is a numerical value used when the advantageous state ending means determines whether or not the ending condition is satisfied. For example, the number of games and the result of the internal lottery are The number of times that a predetermined result has been obtained, the number of times that a display result has become a predetermined display result in a plurality of variable display areas, the total value of game values assigned, the above-described net increase, and the like are applicable.

  In (vi) above, the numerical value updating means need not be configured to uniformly subtract or add numerical values, but can be increased or decreased so that the numerical value is subtracted when the subtraction condition is satisfied and added when the addition condition is satisfied. But you can.

  In (vi) above, the update start effect is at least when the transition to the advantageous state is made in the specific notification state, or the determination result of the prior determination means is any type of the plurality of types of specification results. As long as the result is that the specific notification is performed and the predetermined combination is not derived, it may be executed, or a configuration that is executed at other times.

  In addition, in (v) and (vi) above, the timing related to the start of the special gaming state is the timing when the transition to the special gaming state is determined, the timing when the transition condition to the special gaming state is satisfied, the special game This corresponds to the timing at which the state started.

  (Vii) When the net increase is set to the reference value 0 at the timing related to the control to the AT (AT confirmation notification timing, AT start production execution timing, etc.) and the bonus is won during the AT, the bonus prize is awarded. The AT is interrupted at a related timing (bonus winning confirmation notification timing, bonus winning timing, etc.), and if the net increase at the timing related to the bonus winning is less than 0, the net increase is set to 0 and counted. . For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
Advantageous state transition means for shifting to an advantageous state (AT + RT2) different from the special gaming state (bonus);
When the transition to the special gaming state (bonus) is determined in the advantageous state (AT + RT2), the advantageous state (AT + RT2) is interrupted at a timing related to the transition to the special gaming state (bonus). Interruption means,
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
First reference value setting means for setting a count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) to a reference value (0) at a timing related to the start of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
In the advantageous state (AT + RT2), when the transition to the special gaming state (bonus) is determined, and the advantageous state (AT + RT2) is interrupted, the counting means (at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state (bonus) And a second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) when the count value by the pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0).

  According to this feature, after the transition to the advantageous state, the transition to the special gaming state is determined, and when the advantageous state is interrupted, it is continuously counted from the advantageous state at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state. If the net increase is greater than or equal to the reference value, the net increase in a series of special gaming states following the advantageous state is displayed by maintaining the net increase as it is, while at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state. When the net increase continuously counted from the advantageous state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, the net increase is returned to the reference value at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state and the subsequent counting is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an impression that the net increase in the series of special game states following the advantageous state is diminishing.

  (Viii) The net increment is set to the reference value of 0 at the timing related to the control to the AT (AT confirmation notification timing, AT start effect execution timing, etc.), and until the specific condition is satisfied after the AT ends When a bonus is won, if the net increase at timing related to the bonus winning (bonus winning confirmation notification timing, bonus winning timing, etc.) is less than 0, the net increase is set to 0 and counted. For example, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Machine 1),
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (non-AT / RT1);
The slot machine is a gaming state different from the special gaming state (bonus),
Advantageous state transition means for shifting to the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
A game value giving means for giving the game value (medal) when an award winning (small role) occurs among the winnings;
Net increase display means for displaying a net increase (net increase) obtained by subtracting the game value (inserted number) used for setting the wager number from the game value (payout number) given by the game value giving means ( A net increment display in the liquid crystal display 51),
Counting means (a net increase counter) for counting a value used for displaying the net increase (the net increase display in the liquid crystal display 51) by the net increase display means;
First reference value setting means for setting a count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) to a reference value (0) at a timing related to the start of the advantageous state (AT + RT2);
When the transition to the special gaming state (bonus) is determined in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the advantageous state (AT + RT2) ends (the period up to 32 games), the special gaming state (bonus) Second reference value setting means for setting the count value to the reference value (0) when the count value by the counting means (pure increment counter) is less than the reference value (0) at the timing related to the start of And may be provided.

  According to this feature, when the transition to the special gaming state is determined in the period until the specific condition is satisfied after the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state continues at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state. If the net increment counted in this way is equal to or greater than the reference value, a series of special events that are determined to be continuously transferred until the specific condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous state by maintaining the net increment as it is. When the net increase in the gaming state is displayed, but the net increase continuously counted from the gaming state at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state becomes negative with respect to the reference value, Since the net increment is returned to the reference value at the timing related to the start of the special gaming state and the subsequent counting is performed, after the advantageous state ends, it is determined that a series of transitions are made until the specific condition is satisfied. special Possible to prevent giving the player the impression that net increase is eroded in skill condition.

  Note that the timing related to the transition to the special gaming state in (vii) corresponds to the timing when the transition to the special gaming state is determined, the timing when the transition condition to the special gaming state is satisfied, and the like.

  In (vii) and (viii) above, the timing related to the start of the advantageous state is the timing at which the transition to the advantageous state is determined, the timing at which the transition condition to the advantageous state is satisfied, and the advantageous state has started. The timing is applicable.

  In addition, in (vii) and (viii), the timing related to the start of the special gaming state is the timing at which the transition to the special gaming state is determined, the timing at which the transition condition to the special gaming state is satisfied, and the special gaming state This corresponds to the timing of starting.

[AT latency]
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the control to the ART is continued as long as the remaining navigation stock exists in the ART has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if there is a remaining navigation stock during ART, the navigation period is controlled so that the AT is hidden without executing the navigation effect in the same manner as when the ART is terminated. Also good. For example, when the AT corresponding to one Navistock ends, even if there is a remaining Navistock, it is controlled to the incubation period with a predetermined probability, and the Navistock is consumed again after the incubation period has elapsed. You may make it control to AT.

[RT termination conditions]
In the above-described embodiment, RT0 to RT3 have been described as examples in which the winning is made by winning a specific combination or the special game is stopped. However, RT0 to RT3 may be terminated by digesting a predetermined number of games.

[About the degree of change of the production mode before and after the game state transition]
In the above-described embodiment, the degree of change in the production mode before and after the control from RT3 to RT1 during AT is the change in the production mode by displaying a message image such as “a little more until RT2” on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. An example has been described. Then, the degree of change in the effect mode before and after the control from RT1 to RT2 during AT is exemplified as the change in the effect mode due to the AT start effect being performed and the background image in the liquid crystal display 51 being also changed. explained. However, the degree of change in the production mode before and after the control to RT2 is larger than the degree of change in the production mode before and after the control to RT1 due to a change in other production modes, not limited to such a change in the production mode. It may be.

  For example, the output volume from the speakers 53 and 54 may increase slightly before and after the control to RT1, whereas the output volume from the speakers 53 and 54 may increase greatly before and after the control to RT2. Further, for example, the character on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 slightly grows before and after the control to RT1 (for example, the height increases by 5 cm, the age increases by three years, etc.), but the liquid crystal before and after the control to RT2 The character on the screen of the display 51 may grow greatly (for example, the height increases by 10 cm, the age increases by 10 years, etc.). Further, for example, an effect by the speakers 53 and 54 is added before and after the control to RT1 (one kind of effect means is added), whereas an effect and an effect effect LED 52 by the speakers 53 and 54 are added before and after the control to RT2. The effect by may be added (two types of effect means are added). In this way, the degree of change in the effect mode by one effect means increases, the number or types of effect means increase, etc., so that the player sensuously changes the effect aspect before and after control to RT1. What is necessary is just to feel that the degree of change in the production mode before and after the control to RT2 is greater than the degree.

[Other variations]
(1) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the ART signal is output when the Lip 5 winning, which is the control trigger for the RT2, is established has been described. It is not limited. A specific example will be described below.

    (A) After the start of RT2, an ART signal is output when a winning combination that is highly likely to be derived only at the above-described AT (a role that is very unlikely to appear if there is no navigation effect in RT2) is established. To do. As a result, the external device side can identify that it is highly likely to be controlled by the AT in addition to being in RT2 by receiving the ART signal.

    (B) After the start of RT2, it is determined that the control to RT2 is still continued when the number of specific games more than the expected value of the number of games for which RT2 is ended when the above-mentioned AT is absent. Sometimes, an ART signal may be output. Further, after the start of RT2, an ART signal may be output when the number of medals larger than the expected value of the number of medals that can be expected when the above-mentioned AT is absent is acquired. As a result, the external device side can identify that it is highly likely to be controlled by the AT in addition to being in RT2 by receiving the ART signal.

  (2) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the ART signal is output every time related to the control to the RT 2 has been described. However, if the AT and RT2 are interrupted due to a player's operation error or bonus winning during the AT and RT2, it will be possible to transfer to the AT and RT2 again. Since the ART signal is transmitted to a series of ATs a plurality of times, it is impossible to accurately grasp the initial number of ATs in the external device. Therefore, the ART signal may be output only once during a series of ATs.

  When a series of ATs are 50 game ATs corresponding to the consumption of Navistock 1, in the above-described embodiment, an ART signal cannot be output every time Navistock 1 is consumed, The number of times of control cannot be accurately grasped. In order to solve this, for example, the following processing may be performed to output the ART signal.

  For example, after outputting the ART signal due to the control to RT2, and further after digesting the number of games (50 games) corresponding to consumption of Navistock 1 after being controlled by the RT2, the non-AT In the case of RT2, the control to RT2 is still continued when the number of specific games (e.g., 8 games taking into account the number of judgment values such as the middle bell and the right bell) is greater than the expected number of games that RT2 will end The ART signal may be output again when it is determined that it is in progress. That is, when the main control unit 41 digests the number of games corresponding to consumption of Navistock 1 and then determines that it is still controlled by RT2 even if the number of games that cannot maintain control to RT2 without AT is digested Assuming that the next navigation stock is consumed and in the controlled ART, the ART signal is output again. Thereby, even when a series of ATs is an AT of 50 games corresponding to the consumption of Navistock 1, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of control to a series of ATs in the external device from the number of times of receiving the ART signal.

  (3) Since the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment can reach the specific timing for stopping the output of the ART signal before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the ART signal is started, it is specified in this case. The example in which the output of the ART signal is continued until the predetermined timing after the timing is reached has been described.

  However, the specific timing may be set to be a timing that always follows a predetermined period after the output of the ART signal is started, regardless of an operation from the player. For example, the output of the ART signal may be stopped at the end of the second game after starting the output of the ART signal. In this case, on the external device side, for example, when it is not specified that RT2 is specified, when the output of the ART signal is stopped, it is specified that the control is performed by RT2, and in the game ended this time and the previous game The medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal can be determined as a medal in RT2. Also, when RT2 is specified, when the output of the ART signal is stopped, it is specified that RT2 has ended, and is specified from the ended game and the medal IN signal and medal OUT signal in the previous game. The medal to be played can be determined as a medal that is not in RT2. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect the ART signal in the external device, and to prevent inconvenience that the predetermined period has not yet elapsed when the specific timing is reached after the output of the ART signal is started. it can.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, at least the time for operating the start switch 7 to start a new game, from the start of the output of the ART signal until the specific timing is reached, the reels 2L to 2L It takes time from the start of rotation of 2R until the reels 2L to 2R reach a constant speed and time to operate all the stop switches 8L to 8R. For this reason, in the slot machine 1, it is difficult for a situation in which the specific timing is reached until 2000 ms elapses after the output of the ART signal is started. In addition, it is possible to make the time required for reliably detecting the ART signal in the external device shorter than the shortest time required to complete one game in the slot machine 1, and in such a case, There is no situation where a specific timing for stopping the output of the ART signal is reached before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the ART signal is started. Therefore, the process of counting the output time of the ART signal and the process of delaying the timing for terminating the output of the ART signal according to the output time of the ART signal may not be performed. Specifically, the process of Sk104, Sk106, Sk108, Sk110, Sk111 to Sk113 in FIG. 10 is not performed, and the process proceeds from Sk103 to Sk114. If YES in Sk105, the process proceeds to Sk107, and if YES in Sk107. May be transferred to Sk109, and if NO in Sk107, the process may be transferred to Sk114. Thereby, the processing burden required for outputting the ART signal can be reduced.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal are exemplified as the game related signals output to the outside, but the game related signals are not limited thereto. If the game-related signal is a signal output in accordance with the progress of the game, for example, a game start signal indicating the start of the game, a reel stop signal indicating the stop of the reel, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted, It may be a settlement signal indicating that a credit or a set number of bets has been settled. The output of the ART signal as the specific gaming state signal may be configured to end at a timing not included in the period during which these game-related signals can be output.

  (5) A gaming device which is an external device such as the calling lamp device 200 in the above-described embodiment is provided corresponding to the slot machine 1 and other types of slot machines in the embodiment. Further, in the case of corresponding to the slot machine 1 in the embodiment, when the reception of the ART signal from the slot machine 1 is completed, the betting number during the ART period is traced back by the number of games corresponding to the reception completion timing. It is necessary to identify and count the number of payouts. For this reason, the gaming apparatus such as the calling lamp apparatus 200 may include a setting unit for setting the number of games (for example, the previous game, the previous game, etc.) that goes back from the completion of the ART signal reception. . Further, the setting means may set the number of games to go back according to the ART signal reception timing (when the game is finished or when the medal IN signal is received). As a result, the information in the ART can be accurately totaled so as to correspond to a plurality of types of slot machines including the slot machine 1 in the embodiment and other types of slot machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the ART signal is output for at least 2000 ms, but at least the time that can be specified on the external device side is sufficient, and the output time is appropriately selected according to the external device to be connected. Is possible. Further, the slot machine side may be provided with setting means for setting the minimum output time of the ART signal so that it can be arbitrarily set according to the connected external device. In this case, in Sk108 of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not the minimum output time set by the setting means has elapsed. If it has elapsed, the process proceeds to Sk109, and if not, the process proceeds to SK110. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, RT2 having a high probability of winning a re-gamer is applied as a gaming state in which the state is notified to the external device by outputting an external output signal for a predetermined period. Status, for example, so-called big bonus or regular bonus, where the probability of winning a small role is higher than usual, and where all small roles are allowed (reel pulling is partially limited and winnings for all small roles) CB (challenge bonus) and CT (challenge time), etc.) that are permitted, and a gaming state in which the probability of transition to a state advantageous to the player is higher than usual may be applied. Furthermore, the game state is not limited to a game state advantageous to the player. For example, the game state itself is disadvantageous for the player, but the game state can be started after a certain number of games. A disadvantageous gaming state may be applied as long as it is a gaming state where useful information can be obtained by specifying the end or the like.

  (6) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 41 main control unit, 91 sub control unit, 140 hall computer, 200 calling lamp device, 1000 external output board .

Claims (1)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other can be displayed on a variable display device that can be variably displayed. Is a slot machine from which
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game, setting a delay period when the delay condition is satisfied, and delaying the progress of the game over the delay period;
Specific condition establishment means for establishing the specific condition at a predetermined rate;
Derivation control means for performing control that allows the variable display device to derive a specific display result when the specific condition is satisfied;
Derivation degree specifying means for specifying the derivation degree of the specific display result from the derivation status of the specific display result,
The derivation control means has a derivation degree of the specific display result specified by the derivation degree specifying means less than an average derivation degree at which the specific display result can be expected to be derived, and is a predetermined degree from the average derivation degree A slot machine that performs specific derivation control for deriving the specific display result during the delay period when there is a divergence.

Images